Toshiba Air Conditioner RAV SP1404AT E User Manual

FILE NO. A07-003  
SERVICE MANUAL  
AIR-CONDITIONER  
SPLIT TYPE  
INDOOR UNIT  
<DIGITAL INVERTER>  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
RAV-SM1104UT-E RAV-SM1404UT-E  
OUTDOOR UNIT  
<SUPER DIGITAL INVERTER>  
RAV-SP1104AT-E  
RAV-SP1404AT-E  
RAV-SP1104ATZ-E RAV-SP1404ATZ-E  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
R410A  
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Dec., 2007 ToMo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. REFRIGERANT R410A ........................................................................... 33  
6-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing ............................................................... 33  
6-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation....................................................................... 33  
6-3. Tools .................................................................................................................. 37  
6-4. Recharging of Refrigerant................................................................................ 37  
6-5. Brazing of Pipes................................................................................................ 38  
6-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C ............................................ 40  
7. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT ................................................................. 43  
7-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram..................................................................... 43  
7-2. Control Specifications...................................................................................... 46  
7-3. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board .............................. 58  
7-4. Indoor Print Circuit Board ................................................................................ 59  
8. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS........... 60  
8-1. Outdoor Controls .............................................................................................. 60  
8-2. Outline of Main Controls .................................................................................. 61  
9. TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................. 66  
9-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting........................................................................... 66  
9-2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 68  
10. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD ........................................... 99  
10-1. Indoort Unit ....................................................................................................... 99  
10-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 104  
11. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS ................................................ 105  
11-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 105  
11-2. Setup at Local Site / Others ........................................................................... 116  
11-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number ......................................... 118  
11-4. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 122  
12. ADDRESS SETUP.................................................................................. 129  
12-1. Address Setup ................................................................................................ 129  
12-2. Address Setup & Group Control.................................................................... 130  
12-3. Address Setup ................................................................................................ 132  
13. DETACHMENTS ..................................................................................... 135  
13-1. Indoor Unit...................................................................................................... 135  
13-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 145  
14. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST .................................................. 153  
14-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 153  
14-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 158  
– 3 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY CAUTION  
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.  
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents  
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.  
[Explanation of indications]  
Indication  
Explanation  
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of  
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.  
DANGER  
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage () may be caused on the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet  
[Explanation of illustrated marks]  
Mark  
Explanation  
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.  
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.  
Indicates cautions (Including danger/warning)  
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.  
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]  
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions  
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)  
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.  
DANGER  
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric  
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit () at secondary circuit of the  
high-voltage transformer is applied.  
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an  
electric insulator.  
Turn off breaker.  
: For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.  
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between high-  
voltage capacitor terminals.  
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.  
Execute discharge  
between terminals.  
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.  
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
Prohibition  
– 4 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth  
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.  
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.  
Check earth wires.  
Do not modify the products.  
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.  
Prohibition of modification.  
For spare parts, use those specified ().  
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.  
: For details, refer to the parts list.  
Use specified parts.  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except  
the repair engineers close to the equipment.  
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.  
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.  
Do not bring a child  
close to the equipment.  
Connect the cut-off lead wires with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side upward  
and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is caused at  
the users’ side.  
Insulating measures  
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.  
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire  
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.  
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room.  
When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused.  
No fire  
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may  
catch the inflammables.  
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which  
match with it.  
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a  
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the  
service port is changed from one of the former R22.  
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.  
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.  
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.  
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.  
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in  
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or  
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is  
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.  
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute  
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant.  
In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.  
Refrigerant  
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant  
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.  
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.  
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire  
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.  
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with recovering  
device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a serious accident  
such as breakage or injury is caused.  
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the  
removed wires as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not  
catch the inner wires.  
If incorrect assembly or incorrect wire connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or fire  
is caused at user’s side.  
Assembly/Cabling  
– 5 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V Megger) to  
check the resistance is 2Mor more between the charge section and the non-charge  
metal section (Earth position).  
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s  
side.  
Insulator check  
Ventilation  
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.  
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates.  
A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because  
a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.  
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber  
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.  
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.  
Be attentive to  
electric shock  
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.  
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down  
and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.  
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking  
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant such  
as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does not the  
limit even if the refrigerant leaks.  
Compulsion  
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is  
caused.  
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.  
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric  
shock or fire is caused.  
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.  
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused.  
For a check, turn off the power breaker.  
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test  
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.  
Check after rerair  
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused.  
Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet.  
Check the following items after reinstallation.  
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.  
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.  
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.  
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.  
Check after reinstallation  
CAUTION  
Be sure to put on gloves () during repair work.  
If not putting on gloves, an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.  
() Heavy gloves such as work gloves  
Put on gloves  
Cooling check  
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been  
sufficiently cooled.  
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating  
operation, a burn may be caused.  
– 6 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• New Refrigerant (R410A)  
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.  
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant  
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22).  
Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.  
Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the  
refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work.  
If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident.  
Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.  
2. Cautions on Installation/Service  
1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.  
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of  
the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.  
2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are  
specified for R410A.  
3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do  
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc.  
Use the clean pipes.  
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)  
4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.  
5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.  
Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the  
refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)  
3. Pipe Materials  
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used.  
It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard.  
Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.  
1) Copper pipe  
<Piping>  
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.  
When us#ing a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe  
without seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less.  
Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes.  
(Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)  
<Flare nut>  
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.  
2) Joint  
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.  
The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.  
– 7 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Tools  
1. Required Tools for R410A  
Mixing of different types of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary,  
etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.  
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))  
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.  
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)  
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability  
R410A  
air conditioner installation  
Conventional air  
conditioner installation  
No.  
Used tool  
Usage  
Existence of  
new equipment tional equipment  
for R410A  
Whether conven-  
Whether conventional  
equipment can be used  
can be used  
Flare tool  
Pipe flaring  
Flaring by conventional  
Yes  
*(Note)  
Yes  
*(Note)  
No  

Copper pipe gauge for  
adjusting projection margin flare tool  
Yes  
Yes  
*(Note)  
No  
Torque wrench  
Connection of flare nut  
ƒ
Gauge manifold  
Charge hose  
Evacuating, refrigerant  
charge, run check, etc.  
Yes  
No  
No  
Vacuum pump adapter  
Vacuum evacuating  
Refrigerant charge  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Electronic balance for  
refrigerant charging  
Yes  
Refrigerant cylinder  
Leakage detector  
Charging cylinder  
Refrigerant charge  
Gas leakage check  
Refrigerant charge  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
ˆ
Š
(Note) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projec-  
tion margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.  
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)  
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary  
as the general tools.  
1) Vacuum pump  
7) Screwdriver (+, –)  
8) Spanner or Monkey wrench  
9) Hole core drill  
Use vacuum pump by  
attaching vacuum pump adapter.  
2) Torque wrench  
3) Pipe cutter  
4) Reamer  
10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)  
11) Tape measure  
12) Metal saw  
5) Pipe bender  
6) Level vial  
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.  
1) Clamp meter  
2) Thermometer  
3) IInsulation resistance tester (Megger)  
4) Electroscope  
– 8 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. SPECIFICATIONS  
1-1. Indoor Unit  
1-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
RAV-SM  
564UT-E  
804UT-E  
1104UT-E  
1404UT-E  
Model  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.3  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
10.0  
11.2  
12.5  
14.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
7.17 – 6.57  
8.95 – 8.21  
10.36 – 9.49  
14.66 – 13.44  
1.53  
1.93  
2.21  
3.16  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
97  
3.46  
A
98  
3.68  
A
97  
98  
Cooling  
4.52  
3.96  
Energy efficiency class  
Energy rating ∗∗  
A
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
5.62 – 5.15  
1.20  
97  
9.42 – 8.63  
2.03  
98  
10.96 – 10.05  
14.89 – 13.65  
2.34  
97  
3.21  
98  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
Heating  
4.67  
A
3.94  
A
4.79  
A
4.36  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.33  
15.33  
20.50  
20.50  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
RBC-U31PG (W)-E, RBC-U31PG (WS)-E  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
W: Moon-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5), WS: Stripe-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (Gray: 8B 3/0.3))  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
256  
840  
840  
30  
256  
840  
840  
30  
319  
840  
840  
30  
319  
840  
840  
30  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
950  
950  
20  
950  
950  
20  
950  
950  
24  
950  
950  
24  
Main unit  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
17.5/14.5/13.0  
14  
Turbo fan  
20.5/16.0/13.5  
20  
Turbo fan  
33.5/24.0/19.5  
68  
Turbo fan  
35.0/24.0/20.5  
72  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Air filter  
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)  
RBC-AMT32E, AS21E2, AX31U (W)-E  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
12.7  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
15.9  
43 / 38 / 33  
58 / 53 / 48  
15.9  
44 / 38 / 34  
59 / 53 / 49  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
VP25  
: IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard  
– 9 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
(kW)  
(kW)  
SM564UT-E  
SM563AT-E  
5.3  
SM804UT-E  
SM803AT-E  
6.7  
SM1104UT-E  
SM1103AT-E  
10.0  
SM1404UT-E  
SM1403AT-E  
12.0  
Model  
Outdoor unit  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
5.6  
8.0  
11.2  
14.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
7.89 – 7.24  
9.97 – 9.12  
14.61 – 13.40  
17.62 – 16.14  
1.65  
2.09  
3.11  
3.74  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
95  
3.21  
A
95  
97  
96  
Cooling  
3.21  
3.22  
3.21  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
A
A
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
6.89 – 6.32  
1.44  
95  
10.83 – 9.90  
13.38 – 12.38  
17.88 – 15.87  
2.21  
93  
2.93  
99  
3.80  
98  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
Heating  
3.89  
A
3.62  
A
3.82  
A
3.68  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.33  
15.33  
20.50  
20.50  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
RBC-U31PG (W)-E, RBC-U31PG (WS)-E  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
W: Moon-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5), WS: Stripe-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (Gray: 8B 3/0.3))  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
256  
840  
840  
30  
256  
840  
840  
30  
319  
840  
840  
30  
319  
840  
840  
30  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
950  
950  
24  
950  
950  
24  
950  
950  
24  
950  
950  
24  
Main unit  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Fan  
Turbo fan  
17.5/14.5/13.0  
14  
Turbo fan  
20.5/16.0/13.5  
20  
Turbo fan  
33.5/24.0/19.5  
68  
Turbo fan  
35.0/24.0/20.5  
72  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)  
RBC-AMT32E, AS21E2, AX31U (W)-E  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
12.7  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
15.9  
43 / 38 / 33  
58 / 53 / 48  
15.9  
44 / 38 / 34  
59 / 53 / 49  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
VP25  
: IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard  
– 10 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM564UT-E  
SM564UT-E  
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
10.0  
SM804UT-E  
SM804UT-E  
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
12.5  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
14.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
10.36 – 9.49  
14.66 – 13.44  
2.21  
3.16  
Cooling  
97  
98  
EER  
4.52  
3.96  
Energy efficiency class  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
10.96 – 10.05  
2.34  
A
14.89 – 13.65  
3.21  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
98  
COP  
4.79  
4.36  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
A
Turbo fan  
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0  
14  
Turbo fan  
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5  
20  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
7.5  
Min. length  
3
3
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
101  
Propeller fan  
103  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
15.9  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Main  
(mm)  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
15.9  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
51 / 52  
68 / 69  
: IEC standard  
– 11 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM564UT-E  
SM564UT-E  
SM1103AT-E  
10.0  
SM804UT-E  
SM804UT-E  
SM1403AT-E  
12.5  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
14.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
14.40 – 13.20  
20.57 – 18.97  
3.11  
4.09  
Cooling  
98  
95  
EER  
3.22  
3.06  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
14.40 – 13.20  
2.93  
B
17.74– 16.08  
4.00  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
Heating  
Fan  
98  
99  
COP  
3.82  
3.50  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
B
Turbo fan  
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0  
14  
Turbo fan  
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5  
20  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
32 / 29 / 28  
47 / 44 / 43  
35 / 31 / 28  
50 / 46 / 43  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
7.5  
Min. length  
5
5
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
75  
Propeller fan  
75  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
63  
100  
Main  
(mm)  
15.9  
15.9  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
15.9  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
53 / 54  
70 / 71  
54 / 54  
71 / 71  
: IEC standard  
– 12 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-2. Concealed DuctType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM  
562BT-E  
802BT-E  
1102BT-E  
1402BT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
10.0  
11.2  
12.5  
14.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
6.51 – 5.97  
9.74 – 8.93  
13.78 – 12.63  
17.76 – 16.28  
1.39  
2.10  
2.94  
3.83  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
97  
3.60  
A
98  
3.38  
A
97  
98  
Cooling  
3.40  
3.26  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
A
A
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
7.26 – 6.66  
1.55  
97  
9.74 – 8.93  
2.41  
94  
12.98 – 11.90  
15.82 – 14.50  
2.77  
97  
3.41  
98  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
Heating  
3.61  
A
3.32  
A
4.04  
A
4.11  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.86  
16.30  
21.73  
22.13  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
320  
700  
800  
320  
1000  
800  
320  
1350  
800  
320  
1350  
800  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Main unit  
30  
39  
54  
54  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
13.0/11.9/9.8  
120  
Centrifugal  
19.0/16.2/13.3  
120  
Centrifugal  
27.0/23.0/18.9  
120  
Centrifugal  
33.0/28.0/23.1  
120  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
UFM11BFCE  
UFM31BE  
UFM51BFCE  
UFM71BE  
UFM21BFCE  
UFM21BE  
UFM61BE  
UFM41BE  
UFM61BFCE  
UFM81BE  
TCB-  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
RBC-AMT31E, AS21E2, AX21U(W)-E2  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
40 / 37 / 33  
55 / 52 / 48  
12.7  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
15.9  
42 / 39 / 36  
57 / 54 / 51  
15.9  
44 / 41 / 38  
59 / 56 / 53  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
VP25  
: IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard  
– 13 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM562BT-E  
SM562BT-E  
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
10.0  
SM802BT-E  
SM802BT-E  
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
12.5  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
14.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
13.78 – 12.63  
17.76 – 16.28  
2.94  
3.83  
Cooling  
97  
98  
EER  
3.4  
A
3.26  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
15.82 – 14.50  
3.41  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
12.98 – 11.90  
2.77  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
98  
COP  
4.04  
4.11  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
A
Centrifugal  
13.0 / 11.9 / 9.8  
120  
Centrifugal  
19.0 / 16.2 / 13.3  
120  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
40 / 37 / 33  
55 / 52 / 48  
40 / 37 / 34  
55 / 52 / 49  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
7.5  
Min. length  
3
3
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
101  
Propeller fan  
103  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
15.9  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Main  
(mm)  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
15.9  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
51 / 52  
68 / 69  
: IEC standard  
– 14 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-3. Under CeilingType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM  
562CT-E  
802CT-E  
1102CT-E  
1402CT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
10.0  
11.2  
12.5  
14.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
6.61 – 6.06  
9.47 – 8.93  
12.51 – 11.47  
17.30 – 15.86  
1.41  
97  
2.1  
98  
2.67  
97  
3.73  
98  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
Cooling  
3.55  
A
3.38  
A
3.75  
A
3.35  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
7.03 – 6.44  
10.20 – 9.35  
12.28 – 11.25  
16.93 – 15.52  
1.50  
97  
2.20  
98  
2.62  
97  
3.65  
98  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
Heating  
3.73  
A
3.64  
A
4.27  
A
3.84  
A
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.48  
15.90  
21.35  
21.35  
Shine white  
Appearance  
Ceiling panel  
Model  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
210  
910  
680  
210  
1180  
680  
210  
1595  
680  
210  
1595  
680  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Main unit  
21  
25  
33  
33  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
Heat exchanger  
Fan unit  
Finned tube  
Fan  
Centrifugal  
13.0/11.2/10.0  
60  
Centrifugal  
18.5/16.7/14.6  
60  
Centrifugal  
27.5/24.0/21.2  
120  
Centrifugal  
30.0/26.0/23.1  
120  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Air filter  
Attached main unit  
RBC-AMT31E, AS21E2, TCB-SC642TLE2, AX21UCE2  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
36 / 33 / 30  
51 / 48 / 45  
12.7  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
15.9  
41 / 38 / 36  
56 / 53 / 50  
15.9  
43 / 40 / 37  
58 / 55 / 52  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
9.5  
9.5  
9.5  
VP25  
: IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard  
– 15 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM562CT-E  
SM562CT-E  
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
10.0  
SM802CT-E  
SM802CT-E  
SP1404A(Z)(ZG)-E  
12.5  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
14.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
12.51 – 11.47  
17.30 – 15.86  
2.67  
3.73  
Cooling  
97  
98  
EER  
3.75  
3.35  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
12.28 – 11.25  
2.62  
A
16.93 – 15.52  
3.65  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
98  
COP  
4.27  
3.84  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
A
Centrifugal  
13.0 / 11.2 / 10.0  
60  
Centrifugal  
18.5 / 16.7 / 14.6  
60  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
36 / 33 / 30  
51 / 48 / 45  
38 / 36 / 33  
53 / 51 / 48  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
7.5  
Min. length  
3
3
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
101  
Propeller fan  
103  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
15.9  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Main  
(mm)  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
15.9  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
51 / 52  
68 / 69  
: IEC standard  
– 16 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-4. High WallType  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-  
RAV-  
(kW)  
(kW)  
SM562KRT-E  
SM802KRT-E  
Outdoor unit  
SP562AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
SP802AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
5.0  
5.6  
6.9  
8.0  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
8.33 – 7.63  
13.15 – 12.05  
1.39  
2.4  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
95  
3.60  
A
94  
Cooling  
2.88  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
C
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
8.14 – 7.46  
1.55  
95  
12.91 – 11.84  
2.4  
94  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
Heating  
3.61  
A
3.33  
C
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Energy rating ∗∗  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.34  
15.47  
Pure white  
Appearance  
Ceiling panel  
Model  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
298  
998  
221  
298  
998  
221  
Main unit  
Outer  
dimension  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Main unit  
12  
12  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
Heat exchanger  
Fan unit  
Finned tube  
Fan  
Cross flow fan  
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7  
30  
Cross flow fan  
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2  
30  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Air filter  
Attached main unit  
RBC-AMT31E, AS21E2, TCB-SC642TLE2, AX21UCE2  
(FCU comes with WH-H2UE)  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
39 / 36 / 33  
54 / 51 / 48  
12.7  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
15.9  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
9.5  
VP16  
: IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard  
– 17 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM562KRT-E  
SM562KRT-E  
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
10.0  
SM802KRT-E  
SM802KRT-E  
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
12.3  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
14.0  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
12.98 – 11.90  
18.00 – 16.50  
2.77  
3.88  
Cooling  
97  
98  
EER  
3.61  
3.17  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
13.12 – 12.03  
2.80  
B
17.76 – 16.28  
3.83  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
98  
COP  
4.00  
3.66  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
A
Cross flow fan  
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7  
30  
Cross flow fan  
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2  
30  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
39 / 36 / 33  
54 / 51 / 48  
45 / 41 / 36  
60 / 56 / 51  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
7.5  
Min. length  
3
3
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
101  
Propeller fan  
103  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
15.9  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Main  
(mm)  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
15.9  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
51 / 52  
68 / 69  
: IEC standard  
– 18 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1-5. Compact 4-Way Cassette (600 × 600)Type  
<Single type>  
Indoor unit  
Model  
RAV-SM562MUT-E  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP562AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
Power supply  
(kW)  
(kW)  
5.0  
5.6  
1 phase 230V  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
6.6 – 7.15  
1.53  
Power factor  
EER  
(%)  
97  
Cooling  
3.27  
Energy efficiency class  
Energy rating  
A
4.5  
Electrical  
characteristics  
Running current (A)  
Power consumption(kW)  
6.62 – 7.21  
1.54  
Power factor  
COP  
(%)  
97  
Heating  
3.64  
Energy efficiency class  
Energy rating  
A
4.5  
Maximum current  
Main unit  
15.53  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
RBC-UM11PG(W)-E  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
Panel color  
Moon-white (Muncel 2.5GY 9.0 / 0.5)  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
268  
Main unit  
575  
575  
Outer  
dimension  
27  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
700  
700  
Main unit  
17  
3
Total weight  
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)  
(kg)  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Turbo fan  
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1  
60  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Air filter  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
As per enclosure  
43 / 39 / 34  
58 / 54 / 49  
12.7  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
H/M/L  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Drain port  
Connecting pipe  
6.4  
VP25  
– 19 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Twin type>  
Indoor unit 1  
Indoor unit 2  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-  
RAV-  
SM562MUT-E  
SM562MUT-E  
SP1104(Z)(ZG)-E  
10.0  
Model  
RAV-  
Cooling capacity  
Heating capacity  
(kW)  
(kW)  
11.2  
Indoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
12.51 – 11.47  
2.67  
Cooling  
97  
EER  
3.75  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
Running current  
Power consumption  
Power factor  
A
12.51 – 11.47  
2.67  
Electrical  
characteristics  
(A)  
(kW)  
(%)  
Heating  
Fan  
97  
COP  
4.19  
Energy efficiency class ∗  
A
Turbo fan  
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1  
60  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow H/M/L  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
H/M/L  
H/M/L  
(dB•A)  
43 / 39 / 34  
58 / 54 / 49  
(dB•A)  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Standard length  
(m)  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
Min. length  
3
Max. total length  
Over 30m  
50  
Outer  
dimension  
40g/m (31m to 50m)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
Height  
difference  
Fan  
Propeller fan  
101  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow volume  
Motor  
(m³/min.)  
(W)  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Main  
(mm)  
Gas side  
Sub  
(mm)  
12.7  
Connecting  
pipe  
Main  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
9.5  
Sub  
(mm)  
6.4  
Sound pressure level  
Sound power level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
: IEC standard  
– 20 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2. Outdoor Unit  
<Super Digital Inverter>  
Model name  
Outdoor unit  
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)  
Power supply  
Type  
Motor  
Pole  
Hermetic compressor  
Compressor  
(kW)  
(kg)  
2
4
2
4
3.75  
4
3.75  
4
Refrigerant charged  
Refrigerant control  
1.5  
2.1  
3.1  
3.1  
Pulse motor valve  
Standard length  
Max. total length  
(m)  
(m)  
7.5  
50  
7.5  
50  
7.5  
75  
7.5  
75  
Inter  
connecting pipe  
Additional refrigerant charge  
under long piping connector  
20g/m  
(21m to 50m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 50m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 75m)  
40g/m  
(31m to 75m)  
Outdoor lower  
Height  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
30  
difference  
Outdoor higher  
Height  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
795  
900  
320  
795  
900  
320  
1340  
900  
320  
1340  
900  
320  
Outer dimension Width  
Depth  
Appearance  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Fan  
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)  
(kg)  
55  
62  
93  
93  
Finned tube  
Propeller fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow  
(m³/h)  
(W)  
57  
63  
57  
63  
101  
103  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Motor  
100 + 100  
15.9  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(dB•A)  
(dB•A)  
(°C)  
12.7  
6.4  
15.9  
9.5  
Connecting pipe  
9.5  
9.5  
Sound pressure level  
Cooling/Heating  
Cooling/Heating  
46 / 47  
63 / 64  
47 / 49  
64 / 66  
49 / 50  
66 / 67  
51 / 52  
68 / 69  
Sound power level  
Outside air temperature, Cooling  
Outside air temperature, Heating  
43 to –15°C  
(°C)  
15 to –15°C  
15 to –20°C  
– 21 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3. Operation Characteristic Curve  
• Operation characteristic curve <Super Digital Inverter>  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, SP1404ATZ-E / RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, SP1404ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
22  
22  
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
RAV-SP1104  
RAV-SP1404  
RAV-SP1404  
RAV-SP1104  
6
6
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
4
4
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Outdoor : DB35˚C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C  
Air flow : High  
2
2
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
20  
40  
60  
80  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, SP1404ATZ-E / RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, SP1404ATZG-E  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
105  
120  
110  
100  
95  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
55  
50  
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB20˚C  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
-20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8 10  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
Outdoor temp. (˚C)  
– 22 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)  
2-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM564UT-E  
1000 or more  
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension  
An obstacle  
1000 or more  
The space that is necessary  
for equipping and service  
300  
Take-in port of wiring  
Bottom face of ceiling  
30  
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Ø6.4 (Liquid side)  
Drain upstanding size  
Drain pipe  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Ø12.7 (Gas side)  
connecting port  
(Meterial : PP)  
397.5  
263  
106.5 72 241.5  
105  
337.5  
157  
Bottom face of ceiling  
129  
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150  
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8(procured by locally)  
256  
Electric parts box  
77 10 5 74  
950 Panel external dimension  
780 Hanging bolt pitch  
323  
132  
Ø162  
74  
129  
77  
For branch duct  
knockout square  
hole Ø150  
105  
45˚  
Ceiling panel  
(sold separately)  
105  
Bottom face  
of ceiling  
269  
Ø162  
29  
64  
57  
For branch duct knockout  
square hole Ø150  
(2 positions)  
840 Unit external dimension  
32  
61  
28.5  
362.5  
105  
372.5  
Knockout for simple  
0A for Ø100  
For branch duct knockout  
square hole Ø150  
Bottom face of ceiling  
155  
187  
Z view  
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Bottom face of ceiling  
5
Unit : mm  
– 23 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-SM804UT-E  
1000 or more  
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension  
An obstacle  
1000 or more  
The space that is necessary  
for equipping and service  
300  
Take-in port of wiring  
Bottom face of ceiling  
30  
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Drain upstanding size  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Ø9.5 (Liquid side)  
Drain pipe  
connecting port  
(Meterial : PP)  
397.5  
263  
106.5 72 241.5  
105  
337.5  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Ø15.9 (Gas side)  
157  
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150  
Bottom face of ceiling  
129  
Electric parts box  
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8 (procured by locally)  
77 10 5 74  
950 Panel external dimension  
780 Hanging bolt pitch  
323  
256  
132  
Ø162  
74  
129  
For branch duct  
knockout square  
105  
77  
hole Ø150  
45˚  
Ceiling panel  
(sold separately)  
105  
Bottom face  
of ceiling  
269  
Ø162  
29  
64  
Z
57  
For branch duct knockout  
square hole Ø150  
(2 positions)  
840 Unit external dimension  
32  
61  
28.5  
362.5  
105  
372.5  
For branch duct knockout  
square hole Ø150  
Knockout for simple 0A for Ø100  
155  
187  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Z view  
Bottom face of ceiling  
5
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Unit : mm  
– 24 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
1000 or more  
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension  
An obstacle  
1000 or more  
The space that is necessary  
for equipping and service  
300  
Take-in port of wiring  
Bottom face of ceiling  
30  
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Drain pipe  
Drain upstanding size  
Ø9.5 (Liquid side)  
connecting port  
(Meterial : PP)  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
Ø15.9 (Gas side)  
397.5  
263  
106.5 72 241.5  
105  
337.5  
157  
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150  
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8 (procured by locally)  
319  
Bottom face of ceiling  
129  
Electric parts box  
77 10 5 137  
950 Panel external dimension  
780 Hanging bolt pitch  
323  
132  
Ø162  
137  
129  
77  
For branch duct  
knockout square  
hole Ø150  
105  
45˚  
Ceiling panel  
(sold separately)  
105  
Bottom face  
of ceiling  
269  
29  
Ø162  
64  
Z
57  
840 Unit external dimension  
32  
For branch duct  
knockout square hole Ø150  
(2 positions)  
362.5  
105  
372.5  
61  
28.5  
For branch duct knockout  
square hole Ø150  
Knockout for simple 0A for Ø100  
155  
187  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Z view  
5
Indoor unit  
Bottom face of ceiling  
Unit : mm  
– 25 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
9 5 5 5  
2 4  
1 3 4 0  
4 0  
9 4  
9 5 5 5  
6 1 3  
4 0  
6 0 5  
1 5 5  
5 4  
4 8  
9 5 5 5  
1 7 0  
3 4  
4 6  
5 8 1  
5 3 4  
7 4  
5 8 1  
5 3 4  
7 0  
8 5  
1 2 1  
6 5 5  
3 6 0  
1 2 8 1 1 8  
3 6 5  
7 4  
1 7 . 5  
1 7 . 5  
7
6 5  
– 26 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-TWP30E2, RAV-TWP50E2 (SimultaneousTwin)  
Inner diameter Ø C  
Inner  
diameter Ø D  
Inner  
diameter Ø D  
A
Model (RBC-)  
Liquid side  
A
B
C
D
36  
43  
34  
44  
14  
23  
14  
21  
Ø9.5  
Ø6.4  
TWP30E2  
Gas side  
Liquid side  
Gas side  
Ø15.9 Ø12.7  
Ø9.5 Ø9.5  
Ø15.9 Ø15.9  
TWP50E2  
– 27 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. SYSTEMATIC REFRIGERATING CYCLE DIAGRAM  
3-1. Indoor Unit  
• Single type (Combination of 1 indoor unit and 1 outdoor unit)  
(Indoor unit)  
Distributor  
(Strainer incorporated)  
TCJ sensor  
Strainer  
Air heat  
exchanger  
TC sensor  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
To outdoor unit  
To outdoor unit  
Dimension table  
Capillary tube specifications  
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe  
Model AIU-  
SM56 type  
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty  
Indoor unit  
Gas side ØA  
Liquid side ØB  
Ø2 × 250 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1  
Ø2 × 700 × 1  
SM56, 80 type  
12.7  
6.4  
SM80 type  
Ø2 × 250 × 3, Ø2 × 500 × 1  
Ø2 × 200 × 1, Ø2 × 300 × 2  
Ø2 × 350 × 2, Ø2 × 700 × 1  
SM110, 140 type  
15.9  
9.5  
SM110, 140 type  
• Twin type (Combination of 2 indoor units and 1 outdoor unit)  
(Indoor unit A)  
(Indoor unit B)  
Distributor  
Distributor  
(Strainer incorporated)  
(Strainer incorporated)  
TCJ sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Air heat  
exchanger  
Air heat  
exchanger  
TC sensor  
TC sensor  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØA)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
(Outer dia : ØB)  
Branch pipe  
Branch pipe  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØD)  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
(Outer dia : ØC)  
To outdoor unit  
To outdoor unit  
Indoor unit  
SM56 × 2  
SM80 × 2  
Branch pipe RBC-  
TWP30E2  
A
B
C
D
6.4  
9.5  
12.7  
15.9  
9.5  
9.5  
15.9  
15.9  
TWP50E2  
– 28 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, SP1104ATZ-E, SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E, SP1404ATZ-E, SP1404ATZG-E  
TO sensor  
TS sensor  
PMV  
TL sensor  
Strainer  
TE sensor  
Check joint  
Capillary  
Ø4 ×Ø3 (6 pcs.)  
Cooling: High pressure  
Heating: Low pressure  
Heat exchanger  
Ø8, 2 rows, 52 stages  
FP1.45, flat fin  
Distributor  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side Ø9.5  
Packed valve  
TD sensor  
In cooling operation  
In heating operation  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side Ø15.9  
Ball valve  
Strainer  
Muffler  
Cooling: Low pressure  
Heating: High pressure  
Ø25 × L180  
Ø25 × L210  
Accumulator Rotary compressor  
(2500cc) (DA422A3F-25M)  
3-3. Systematic Diagram of Refrigerating Cycle  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E  
Pressure  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Pd Ps Pd Ps  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
drive revolution Indoor  
frequency  
(rps)  
Indoor heat  
exchanger  
Outdoor heat  
exchanger  
Discharge  
Suction  
fan  
(TD)  
66  
(TS)  
14  
9
(TC)  
12  
13  
5
(TL) (TE)  
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.57 0.99 26.2 10.1  
3.30 1.09 33.7 11.1  
44  
49  
32  
2
38  
43  
25  
3
38  
53  
21  
43  
26  
71  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27/19  
32/24  
18/15.5  
20/–  
35/–  
43/–  
–5/–  
7/6  
78  
1.74 0.75 17.8  
2.32 0.73 23.7  
7.7  
7.4  
46  
7
Standard  
65  
3
39  
54  
38  
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.22 1.17 32.9 11.9  
2.17 0.30 22.1 3.1  
73  
19  
–15  
14  
–14  
15  
–13  
30/–  
24/18  
–15/–  
87  
15/–  
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp  
meter becomes 2 times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).  
*
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
Pressure  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
drive revolution Indoor  
frequency  
(rps)  
Indoor heat  
exchanger  
Outdoor heat  
exchanger  
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)  
Discharge  
Suction  
fan  
Pd  
Ps  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
73  
(TS)  
12  
9
(TC)  
10  
13  
6
(TL) (TE)  
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
2.72 0.90 27.8  
9.2  
46  
51  
33  
2
38  
45  
25  
2
51  
55  
21  
53  
26  
90  
HIGH  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
27/19  
32/24  
18/15.5  
20/–  
35/–  
43/–  
–5/–  
7/6  
3.34 1.07 34.1 10.9  
80  
1.75 0.76 17.9  
2.59 0.69 26.4  
7.8  
7.0  
47  
8
Standard  
75  
3
43  
53  
42  
Heating Overload  
Low load  
3.13 1.05 31.9 10.7  
2.40 0.21 24.5 2.1  
72  
16  
–22  
12  
–19  
13  
–18  
30/–  
24/18  
–15/–  
97  
15/–  
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp  
meter becomes two times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).  
*
– 29 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. WIRING DIAGRAM  
4-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
LM1  
LM3  
LM2  
LM4  
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
FM  
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
DM  
FS  
CN333  
(WHI)  
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
CN510  
(WHI)  
CN504 CN34  
(WHI) (RED)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
TA  
TCJ  
TC  
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN334  
(WHI)  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
Fuse, F01  
T6.3A, 250V~  
Fuse, F02  
T3.15A, 250V~  
+
~
~
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
1
2
3
4
DC20V  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
1
3
5
1
3
5
CN519  
(WHI)  
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN67  
(BLK)  
1
2
CN508  
(RED)  
Control P.C. Board  
for Indoor Unit  
MCC-1570  
1
2
3
CN80  
P01  
BLK  
(GRN)  
1
2
CN73  
(RED)  
(EXCT)  
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
1
2
CN70  
(WHI)  
CN41  
(BLU)  
CN309  
(YEL)  
CN61 CN32  
(YEL) (WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
(T10)  
(Fan drive)  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
CN51  
(RED)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK  
BLK  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
P.C. board  
MCC-1440  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
A
B
Terminal  
CN001  
(WHI)  
U3 U4  
for central  
Serial  
signal  
remote controller  
Wired  
Adapter for  
Connection interface  
(Option)  
remote controller wireless remote controller  
L N  
Signal phase  
220–240V~, 50Hz  
Color  
Identification  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
Outdoor unit  
Fan Motor  
BLK : BLACK  
BLU : BLUE  
RED : RED  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
TA  
Indoor temp. sensor  
Temp. sensor  
TC, TCJ  
LM1, LM2, LM3, LM4  
Louver motor  
Outdoor unit  
earth screw  
DM  
FS  
Drain pump Motor  
Float Switch  
YEL : YELLOW  
– 30 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2. Outdoor Unit (Wiring Diagram)  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
CM  
Reactor  
Reactor  
(RED) (WHI) (BLK)  
(GRY)  
(GRY)  
(WHI)  
(WHI)  
U
V
W
P04 P05  
P06 P07  
CN200 CN201 CN202  
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN400  
(WHI)  
FM01  
FM02  
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN300  
(WHI)  
49C  
SW804 SW801 SW800  
1
2
1
2
CN609  
(BLU)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN610  
(YEL)  
Control P.C. Board  
MCC-1570  
SW803  
1
2
1
2
CN604  
(WHI)  
TL  
L/F  
1
3
1
2
3
CN603  
(WHI)  
TD  
Fuse, F01  
T25A, 250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN602  
(YEL)  
(BLK)  
TO  
TE  
P09  
SW802  
Fuse, F03  
T10A, 250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN601  
(WHI)  
RY704  
1
3
1
2
3
CN600  
(WHI)  
TS  
CN704  
(BLU)  
CN701  
(WHI)  
CN04  
(WHI)  
P01  
P02  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
1
3
1
1
4
4
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
CN710  
(WHI)  
(RED)  
(WHI)  
PMW  
20SF  
Earth  
screw  
Earth  
screw  
Symbol  
CM  
Parts name  
Compressor  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
L
N
FM01, 02  
PMV  
TD  
TS  
TE  
TL  
TO  
20SF  
49C  
RY  
Fan Motor  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Outdoor unit  
Indoor unit  
Discharge pipe temp. sensor  
Suction pipe temp. sensor  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor 1  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor 2  
Outside temp. sensor  
4-way valve coil  
Power supply  
220–240V~, 50Hz  
Earth  
screw  
Color  
Identification  
BLK  
BLU  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
WHI  
YEL  
Compressor case thermostat  
Relay  
L/F  
Line Filter  
: BLACK  
: BLUE  
1.  
indicates the terminal block.  
Alphanumeric characters in the cycle indicate the terminal No.  
2. The two-dot chain line indicates the wiring procured locally.  
3. indicates the P.C. board.  
: WHITE  
: YELLOW  
4. For the indoor unit circuit, refer to the wiring diagram of the indoor unit.  
– 31 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS  
5-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Fan motor (for indoor)  
Type  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 60 W  
SWF-230-60-2R  
328 mm  
2
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Float switch  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
3
Ø6 mm, 1000 mm  
Ø6 mm, 950 mm  
FS-0218-102  
MDP-1401  
4
5
6
Drain pump motor  
RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Fan motor  
ICF-280-150-1  
328 mm  
Output (Rated) 90 W  
10 kat 25°C  
2
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Float switch  
3
Ø6 mm, 1000 mm  
Ø6 mm, 950 mm  
FS-0218-102  
MDP-1401  
10 kat 25°C  
4
10 kat 25°C  
5
6
Drain pump motor  
5-2. Outdoor Unit (Parts Ratings)  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Compressor  
DA422A3F-25M  
2
Outdoor fan motor  
ICF-280-A100-1  
Output 100W  
3
Reactor  
CH-62  
5.7mH, 18.5A  
AC240V  
4
4-way valve coil  
VHV-01AP552B1  
5
PMV coil  
UKV-A038  
DC12V  
6
P.C. board  
MCC-1571  
AC220 – 240V  
AC250V, 25A  
AC250V, 10A  
AC250V, 3.15A  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
50 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
OFF: 125 4°C, ON: 90 5°C  
7
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)  
Outdoor temp. sensor (TO sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)  
Heat exchanger mid. Temp sensor (TL sensor)  
Compressor thermo. (Protection)  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
US-622  
5-3. Accessory Separate Sold Parts  
RBC-U31PG(WS)-E, RBC-U31PG(W)-E (Ceiling panel)  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Motor-louver  
MP24ZN3N  
DC 12 V  
2
– 32 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. REFRIGERANT R410A  
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC  
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.  
6. When an air conditioning system charged with a  
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small  
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,  
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration  
does not exceed the marginal level.  
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A  
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant  
(R22). The refrigerating oil is also changed in  
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful  
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or refriger-  
ating oil are not entered in the refrigerant cycle of  
the air conditioner using the new refrigerant during  
installation work or servicing time.  
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its  
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an  
oxygen starvation accident may result.  
7. Be sure to carry out installation or removal  
according to the installation manual.  
The next section describes the precautions for air  
conditioner using the new refrigerant.  
Improper installation may cause refrigeration  
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.  
Conforming to contents of the next section together  
with the general cautions included in this manual,  
perform the correct and safe work.  
8. Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner  
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs  
please call a qualified air conditioner technician  
or electrician.  
Improper repair’s may result in water leakage,  
electric shock and fire, etc.  
6-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing  
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than  
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may  
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and materi-  
als exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to carry out  
installation/servicing safely while taking the following  
precautions into consideration.  
6-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation  
6-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used  
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes  
and joints are mainly used.  
1. Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air  
conditioner which is designed to operate with  
R410A.  
Copper pipes and joints suitable for the refrigerant  
must be chosen and installed.  
Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean copper  
pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are less  
affected by contaminants.  
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed, pressure  
in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally  
high, and it may cause personal injury, etc. by a  
rupture.  
1. Copper Pipes  
2. Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use tools  
and materials exclusive for the refrigerant R410A.  
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes  
which are made of either copper or copper alloy  
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil  
is less than 40 mg/10 m.  
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the  
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air condi-  
tioner using R410A as refrigerant.  
Do not use copper pipes having a collapsed,  
deformed or discolored portion (especially on  
the interior surface).  
To prevent mischarging, the diameter of the  
service port differs from that of R22.  
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube  
may become blocked with contaminants.  
3. If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during  
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.  
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs pres-  
sure higher than when using R22, it is necessary  
to choose adequate materials.  
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,  
a poisonous gas may occur.  
4. When installing or removing an air conditioner,  
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the  
refrigeration cycle.  
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A  
are as shown in Table 6-2-1. Never use copper  
pipes thinner than 0.8mm even when it is avail-  
able on the market.  
Otherwise, pressure in the refrigeration cycle  
may become abnormally high so that a rupture  
or personal injury may be caused.  
5. After completion of installation work, check to  
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas  
leakage.  
NOTE:  
Refer to the “6-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping  
of R22 or R407C”.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming  
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,  
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.  
– 33 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes  
Thickness (mm)  
Nominal diameter  
Outer diameter (mm)  
R410A  
0.80  
R22  
0.80  
0.80  
0.80  
1.00  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
0.80  
1.00  
1. Joints  
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all contaminants.  
a) Flare Joints  
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes cannot be used for pipings whose outer diameter exceeds  
20 mm. In such a case, socket joints can be used.  
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and flare nuts are as shown in Tables 6-2-3 to 6-2-5 below.  
b) Socket Joints  
Socket joints are such that they are brazed for connections, and used mainly for thick pipings whose  
diameter is larger than 20 mm. Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in Table 6-2-2.  
Table 6-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints  
Reference outer diameter of  
copper pipe jointed (mm)  
Minimum joint thickness  
(mm)  
Nominal diameter  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.50  
0.60  
0.70  
0.80  
12.7  
15.9  
6-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials  
When performing the refrigerant piping installation, care should be taken to ensure that water or dust does not  
enter the pipe interior, that no other oil other than lubricating oils used in the installed air conditioner is used,  
and that refrigerant does not leak. When using lubricating oils in the piping processing, use such lubricating oils  
whose water content has been removed. When stored, be sure to seal the container with an airtight cap or any  
other cover.  
1. Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions  
a) Cutting the Pipe  
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe so that it is not deformed.  
b) Removing Burrs and Chips  
If the flared section has chips or burrs, refrigerant leakage may occur.  
Carefully remove all burrs and clean the cut surface before installation.  
– 34 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c) Insertion of Flare Nut  
d) Flare Processing  
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper pipe have been cleaned.  
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare processing correctly.  
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conventional flare tool.  
ØD  
A
Flare processing dimensions differ according  
to the type of flare tool.  
When using a conventional flare tool, be sure  
to secure “dimension A” by using a gauge for  
size adjustment.  
Fig. 6-2-1 Flare processing dimensions  
Table 6-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A / R22  
A (mm)  
Outer  
diameter  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R410A)  
Conventional flare tool  
(R22)  
Flare tool for  
R410A, R22  
clutch type  
Clutch type Wing nut type Clutch type Wing nut type  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
2.0 to 2.5  
2.0 to 2.5  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
12.7  
15.9  
Table 6-2-4 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
23  
25  
17  
22  
26  
29  
13.2  
16.6  
19.7  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
12.9  
16.0  
Table 6-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.4  
9.5  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
20  
23  
34  
17  
22  
24  
27  
36  
13.0  
16.2  
19.4  
23.3  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
24.0  
9.7  
12.7  
15.9  
19.0  
12.9  
16.0  
19.2  
– 35 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
B
A
C
Fig. 6-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface  
2. Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions  
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions do not have any scar or dust, etc.  
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface with the union axis.  
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench.The tightening torque for R410A is  
the same as that for conventional R22. Incidentally, when the torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.  
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable. When choosing the tighten-  
ing torque, comply with values designated by manufacturers. Table 6-2-6 shows reference values.  
NOTE:  
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the manufacturer. If any other oil is  
used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause the compressor to burn out.  
Table 6-2-6 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]  
Tightening torque of torque  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
(mm)  
Tightening torque  
N•m (kgf•m)  
wrenches available on the market  
N•m (kgf•m)  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.4  
9.5  
14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8)  
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2)  
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2)  
63 to 77 (6.3 to 7.7)  
16 (1.6), 18 (1.8)  
42 (4.2)  
12.7  
15.9  
55 (5.5)  
65 (6.5)  
– 36 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3. Tools  
6-3-1. RequiredTools  
Refer to the “4. Tools” (Page 8)  
6-4. Recharging of Refrigerant  
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the  
following steps.  
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant  
remains in the equipment.  
When the compound gauge’s pointer has indicated  
–0.1 Mpa (–76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the  
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pump’s  
power switch.  
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service  
port at the outdoor unit’s gas side.  
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure  
that the compound gauge’s pointer does not return.  
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump  
adapter.  
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,  
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the  
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge  
liquid refrigerant.  
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas  
sides.  
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the  
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pump’s  
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the  
cycle.  
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)  
1) Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.  
2) If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.  
3) Do not carry out additional charging.  
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the  
refrigeration cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the  
specified amount is charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high  
pressure, and may cause a rupture or personal injury.  
(INDOOR unit)  
(Liquid side)  
(OUTDOOR unit)  
Opened  
Closed  
(Gas side)  
Refrigerant cylinder  
(With siphon pipe)  
Check valve  
Open/Close valve  
for charging  
Service port  
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging  
Fig. 6-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging  
– 37 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1) Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.  
2) When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.  
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.  
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the  
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.  
[ Cylinder with siphon ]  
[ Cylinder without siphon ]  
Gauge manifold  
Gauge manifold  
OUTDOOR unit  
OUTDOOR unit  
c y l i n d e r  
a n t i g e r R e f r  
Refrigerant  
cylinder  
Electronic  
balance  
Electronic  
balance  
Siphon  
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.  
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the composi-  
tion of the charged refrigerant changes and the  
characteristics of the equipment varies.  
Fig. 6-4-2  
6-5. Brazing of Pipes  
1) Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react  
with sulfur and produce a fragile compound  
water solution, which may cause a gas  
leakage.Therefore, use any other type of  
brazing filler at a hot spring resort, etc., and  
coat the surface with a paint.  
6-5-1. Materials for Brazing  
1. Silver brazing filler  
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed  
of silver and copper. It is used to join iron, copper  
or copper alloy, and is relatively expensive though  
it excels in solderability.  
2) When performing brazing again at time of  
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.  
2. Phosphor bronze brazing filler  
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used  
to join copper or copper alloy.  
6-5-2. Flux  
1. Reason why flux is necessary  
3. Low temperature brazing filler  
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign  
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow  
of brazing filler.  
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called  
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead. Since it is  
weak in adhesive strength, do not use it for  
refrigerant pipes.  
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal  
surface from being oxidized.  
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,  
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated  
metal.  
– 38 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Characteristics required for flux  
6-5-3. Brazing  
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with the  
brazing temperature.  
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,  
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it  
must be performed by a person qualified.  
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux  
is hard to carbonize.  
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in  
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to  
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas  
flow.  
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.  
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and  
brazing filler is minimum.  
• It excels in coating performance and is harm-  
less to the human body.  
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.  
As the flux works in a complicated manner as  
described above, it is necessary to select an  
adequate type of flux according to the type and  
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and  
brazing method, etc.  
1. Brazing method to prevent oxidation  
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to  
the Nitrogen gas cylinder.  
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping mate-  
rial, and attach a flow-meter to the cylinder.  
3. Types of flux  
3) Apply a seal onto the clearance between the  
piping material and inserted copper pipe for  
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the  
Nitrogen gas.  
• Noncorrosive flux  
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric  
acid.  
It is effective in case where the brazing tem-  
perature is higher than 800°C.  
4) When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to  
keep the piping end open.  
• Activated flux  
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing  
are this type.  
5) Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it  
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa  
(0.2kgf/cm²) by means of the reducing valve.  
It features an increased oxide film removing  
capability due to the addition of compounds  
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride  
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid  
compound.  
6) After performing the steps above, keep the  
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools down  
to a certain extent (temperature at which  
pipes are touchable with hands).  
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.  
4. Piping materials for brazing and used  
brazing filler/flux  
Piping  
material  
Used brazing  
filler  
Used  
flux  
M
Copper - Copper Phosphor copper Do not use  
Flow meter  
Copper - Iron  
Iron - Iron  
Silver  
Silver  
Paste flux  
Vapor flux  
Stop valve  
Nitrogen gas  
cylinder  
From Nitrogen cylinder  
1) Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.  
2) When chlorine contained in the flux remains  
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.  
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain  
chlorine.  
Pipe  
Nitrogen  
gas  
Rubber plug  
3) When adding water to the flux, use water  
which does not contain chlorine (e.g. distilled  
water or ion-exchange water).  
4) Remove the flux after brazing.  
Fig. 6-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing  
– 39 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C  
6. Check the oil when the existing air conditioner was  
Instruction of Works:  
removed after refrigerant had been recovered.  
In this case, if the oil is judged as clearly different  
compared with normal oil  
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be  
reused for our digital inverter R410A products  
installations.  
• The refrigerator oil is copper rust green :  
There is possibility that moisture is mixed with the  
oil and rust generates inside of the pipe.  
• There is discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, or bad smell.  
NOTE)  
Confirmation of existence of scratch or dent of the  
former pipes to be applied and also confirmation of  
reliability of the pipe strength are conventionally  
referred to the local site.  
• A large quantity of sparkle remained wear-out  
powder is observed in the refrigerator oil.  
If the definite conditions can be cleared,  
it is possible to update the existing R22 and  
R407C pipes to those for R410A models.  
7. The air conditioner which compressor was ex-  
changed due to a faulty compressor.  
When the discolored oil, a large quantity of the  
remains, mixture of foreign matter, or a large  
quantity of sparkle remained wear-out powder is  
observed, the cause of trouble will occur.  
6-6-1. Basic Conditions Need to Reuse the  
Existing Pipe  
Check and observe three conditions of the refrigerant  
piping works.  
8. Installation and removal of the air conditioner are  
repeated with temporary installation by lease and  
etc.  
9. In case that type of the refrigerator oil of the  
existing air conditioner is other than the following oil  
(Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-S, MS (Synthetic oil),  
alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze), ester series,  
PVE only of ether series.  
1. Dry  
(There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)  
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)  
3. Tight (There is no refrigerant leak.)  
6-6-2. Restricted Items to Use the Existing Pipes  
In the following cases, the existing pipes cannot be  
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or ex-  
change them with new pipes.  
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use the  
new pipes for the works.  
• Winding-insulation of the compressor may  
become inferior.  
NOTE)  
The above descriptions are results of confirmation by  
our company and they are views on our air condition-  
ers, but they do not guarantee the use of the existing  
pipes of the air conditioner that adopted R410A in  
other companies.  
2. When the thickness of the existing pipe is thinner  
than the specified “Pipe diameter and thickness” be  
sure to use the new pipes for the works.  
• The operating pressure of R410A is high  
(1.6 times of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch  
or dent on the pipe or thinner pipe is used, the  
pressure strength is poor and may cause break-  
age of the pipe at the worst.  
6-6-3. Branching Pipe for Simultaneous  
Operation System  
• In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA-  
specified branching pipe is used, it can be reused.  
Branching pipe model name:  
RBC-TWP30E-2, RBC-TWP50E-2  
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous  
operation system (twin system), there is a case of  
using branch pipe that has insufficient compressive  
strength.  
* Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)  
Pipe outer diameter Ø6.4 Ø9.5 Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
R410A  
Thickness  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
R22  
(R407C)  
In this case please change it to the branch pipe for  
R410A.  
• In case that the pipe diameter is Ø12.7 mm or less  
and the thickness is less than 0.7 mm, be sure to use  
the new pipes for works.  
3. The pipes are left as coming out or gas leaks.  
(Poor refrigerant)  
• There is possibility that rain water or air including  
moisture enters in the pipe.  
4. Refrigerant recovery is impossible.  
(Refrigerant recovery by the pump-down operation  
on the existing air conditioner)  
6-6-4. Curing of Pipes  
When removing and opening the indoor unit or outdoor  
unit for a long time, cure the pipes as follows:  
• Otherwise rust may generate when moisture or  
foreign matter due to dewing enters in the pipes.  
• The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and a new  
piping work is necessary.  
• There is possibility that a large quantity of poor  
oil or moisture remains inside of the pipe.  
Place position  
Term  
Curing manner  
1 month or more  
Less than 1 month  
Every time  
Pinching  
5. A dryer on the market is attached to the existing  
pipes.  
Outdoors  
Pinching or taping  
• There is possibility that copper green rust gener-  
ated.  
Indoors  
– 40 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6-5. Final Installation Checks  
Is there no scratch or dent on the existing pipes?  
Existing pipe: NO * Use a new pipes.  
NO  
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?  
YES  
* After the existing air conditioner operated in cooling mode  
for approx. 30 minutes or longer*, recover the refrigerant.  
* For cooling the pipes and recovering of oil  
• Refrigerant recovery: Pump down method  
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 Mpa  
* Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and  
carry out flashing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 Mpa) to remove  
the remains inside of the pipe.  
Note] In case of twin, also be sure to flash the  
branching pipe.  
(If there is discharge of remains,  
it is judged that there is a large quantity of remains.)  
Was not largely discolored oil or  
a large quantity of remains discharged?  
(When the oil deteriorates, the color of the  
oil changes to muddy and black color.)  
NO  
Clean the pipes or use the new pipes.  
If you are in trouble of  
pipe cleaning, please contact us.  
YES  
Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.  
• Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the  
indoor/outdoor units.  
(Do not use the flare nut of the existing pipe.)  
• Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.  
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/  
machining size due to pipe compression.  
In case that the gas pipe Ø19 mm is used for the  
outdoor unit of SM803 (3 HP) or higher:  
(Gas pipe size of our R410A model 3 to 5 HP is Ø15.9 mm)  
1) Flare nut width: H  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control  
Copper pipe  
Ø6.4  
17  
Ø9.5  
22  
P.C board of the outdoor unit to ON side.  
outer dia.  
At shipment from factory OFF ON for existing pipe  
(Refer to the table below.) (Be sure to set the contents  
in the table below in order to restrict the refrigerating  
cycle pressure of the equipment in the pipe standard.)  
26  
24  
29  
27  
36  
For R410A  
H
Same  
For R22  
Same as above  
as above  
Existing pipe SW  
Switch  
2) Flare machining size: A  
(mm)  
3 HP  
Bit 3 of SW801 ON  
Copper pipe  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
13.2  
13.0  
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0  
outer dia.  
A
4, 5 HP  
Bit 3 of SW802 ON  
9.1  
9.0  
16.6  
16.2  
19.7  
19.4  
24.0  
23.3  
For R410A  
For R22  
Becomes large a little for R410A  
Do not apply the refrigerator oil to the flare surface.  
* (Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge,  
Gas leak check  
Trial run  
– 41 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6-6. Handling of Existing Pipe  
6-6-7. Recovery Method of Refrigerant for  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E  
When using the existing pipe, carefully check it for  
the following:  
• Use the refrigerant recovery switch SW801 on the  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit to recover refriger-  
ant when the indoor unit or outdoor unit is moved.  
• Wall thickness (within the specified range)  
• Scratches and dents  
• Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe  
• Flare looseness and leakage from welds  
• Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator  
Operation method  
1. Turn on the power of the air conditioner.  
2. Select the FAN mode for indoor unit operation  
with the remote controller.  
Cautions for using existing pipe  
• Do not reuse the flare to prevent gas leak.  
3. Set SW804 on the P.C. board of the outdoor unit  
to all OFF, and then push SW801 for one second  
or more.  
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then  
process it to a flare.  
The air conditioner enters the forced cooling  
mode for up to 10 minutes.  
• Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to  
keep the inside of the pipe clean.  
Operation or handling the valve to recover  
refrigerant during this time period.  
If discolored oil or much residue is discharged,  
wash the pipe.  
4. Upon completion of refrigerant recovery, close  
the valve and push SW801 for at least one  
second to stop operation.  
• Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leak.  
When the pipe corresponds to any of the follow-  
ing, do not use it. Install a new pipe instead.  
5. Turn off the power.  
• The pipe has been open (disconnected from  
indoor unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.  
• The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit  
that does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or  
R407C.  
P.C. board  
Refrigerant recovery  
switch SW801  
Optional connector  
CN610  
• The existing pipe must have a wall thickness  
equal to or larger than the following thickness.  
Special operation  
select switch SW804  
Reference outside diameter  
(mm)  
Wall thickness  
(mm)  
Existing pipe switch  
SW802  
Ø9.5  
Ø15.9  
Ø19.1  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
• Never use any pipe with a wall thickness less than  
these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure  
capacity.  
DANGER  
Take care for an electric shock because the  
P.C.board is electrified.  
To use an existing Ø19.1 mm pipe, set bit 3 of  
SW802 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C. board  
of the outdoor unit to ON. In this case, the heating  
performance may be reduced depending on the  
outside air temperature and room temperature.  
SW802  
When shipped from factory  
When using existing pipe  
– 42 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT  
7-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram  
7-1-1. Connection of Main (Sub) Remote Controller  
Main (sub) master remote controller (Max. 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Display LCD  
Display LED  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Display LCD  
LCD driver  
MCU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
CN2  
CN1  
MCU  
DC5V  
DC5V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Power circuit  
3  
Power  
circuit  
Secondary  
battery  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
A
B
(Follower)  
B
A
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
communication circuit  
DC5V  
DC12V  
× 4  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
Louver  
motor  
2  
2  
Driver  
MCU  
Drain  
pump  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in  
case of mounting network adapter when two  
main (sub) remote controllers are connected.  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub  
remote controller is unavailable.  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
Outdoor unit  
– 43 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-2. Connection of Wireless Remote Controller Kit  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
Wireless remote controller kit  
Receiver P.C. board (MCC-1504)  
Display LED  
Receive circuit  
Buzzer  
Function setup SW  
Grille up/down SW  
MCU  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Temporary  
operation SW  
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
(Follower)  
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
communication circuit  
DC5V  
DC12V  
× 4  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
Louver  
motor  
2  
2  
Driver  
MCU  
Drain  
pump  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in  
case of mounting network adapter when two  
main (sub) remote controllers are connected.  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
Outdoor unit  
– 44 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-3. Connection of Both Main (Sub) Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller Kit  
Indoor unit  
#1 (Master)  
Main (sub) master remote controller  
Wireless remote controller kit  
(Max. 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Receiver P.C. board  
(MCC-1504)  
Display LED  
Display  
LCD  
Function  
setup  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Receive  
circuit  
Function setup SW  
Grille up/down SW  
Display  
LED  
Key  
MCU  
switch  
Function  
setup  
MCU  
CN2  
CN1  
Buzzer  
MCU  
Key  
switch  
DC5V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Power  
circuit  
DC5V  
DC5V  
3  
Power  
circuit  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
Temporary  
operation SW  
Power  
circuit  
Secondary  
battery  
A
B
A
B
#2  
(Follower)  
A
#3  
(Follower)  
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)  
DC20V  
Remote controller  
communication circuit  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
DC5V  
DC12V  
× 4  
Humidifier output  
Same as left  
Same as left  
TCJ sensor  
Float input  
HA  
Louver  
2  
2  
Driver  
motor  
MCU  
Drain  
pump  
Auto grille  
panel  
Outside  
output  
Indoor  
MCU  
fan motor  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Defrost  
Thermo. ON  
COOL  
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
synchronous  
signal input circuit  
HEAT  
FAN  
Power circuit  
DC280V  
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit  
Up to 8 units are connectable. 1  
Outdoor unit  
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of  
mounting network adapter.  
Case of TCC-LINK adapter  
(Option)  
2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.  
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.  
TCC-LINK  
adapter P.C. board  
(MCC-1440)  
3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote  
controller is unavailable.  
4 In the left system, set the wireless remote  
controller side as the follower remote controller  
when using the main (sub) wired remote controller  
as the master remote controller.  
TCC-LINK  
Central controller  
(Option)  
U3  
U4  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
Outdoor unit  
– 45 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2. Control Specifications  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
1) Distinction of outdoor unit  
Remarks  
1
When power  
supply is reset  
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are distin-  
guished and the control is selected according to the  
distinguished result.  
2) Setting of indoor fan speed and existence of air direction  
adjustment  
Based on EEPROM data, select setting of the indoor fan  
speed and the existence of air direction adjustment.  
Air speed (rpm)/  
Air direction adjustment  
2
Operation  
mode selection  
1) Based on the operation mode selecting command from the  
remote controller, the operation mode is selected.  
Remote controller  
Control outline  
command  
STOP  
FAN  
Air conditioner stops.  
Fan operation  
COOL  
DRY  
Cooling operation  
Dry operation  
HEAT  
AUTO  
Heating operation  
Ta: Room temp.  
Ts: Setup temp.  
To: Outside temp.  
• COOL/HEAT operation mode is  
automatically selected by Ta, Ts  
and To for operation.  
• The operation is performed as  
shown in the following figure  
according to Ta value at the first  
time only. (In the range of Ts +  
α –1 < Ta < Ts + α + 1, Cooling  
thermo. OFF (Fan)/Setup air  
volume operation continues.)  
Cooling  
operation  
+1.0  
Cooling thermo. OFF (Fan)  
• Setup air volume  
Ta  
(˚C)  
Ts + α  
-1.0  
Heating  
operation  
α is corrected according to the outside temperature.  
Outside temp.  
No To  
Correction value (α)  
0K  
–1K  
0K  
k = deg  
To 24°C  
24 > To 18°C  
To < 18°C  
To error  
+1K  
0K  
3
Room temp.  
control  
1) Adjustment range: Remote controller setup temperature (°C)  
COOL/DRY  
18 to 29  
HEAT  
AUTO  
18 to 29  
17 to 27  
Wired type  
18 to 29  
16 to 30  
Wireless type  
18 to 30  
– 46 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
Shift of suction  
3
Room temp.  
control  
2) Using the Item code 06, the setup temperature in heating  
operation can be corrected.  
temperature in heating  
(Continued)  
operation  
Setup data  
0
2
4
6
Setup temp. correction  
+0°C  
+2°C  
+4°C  
+6°C  
Setting at shipment  
Setup data  
2
4
Automatic  
capacity control  
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the operation  
frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.  
2) Cooling operation  
(GA control)  
Every 90 seconds, the room temperature difference  
between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the  
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain  
the correction value of the frequency command and then  
the present frequency command is corrected.  
Ta (n) – Ts (n) : Room temp. difference  
n
: Counts of detection  
Ta (n-1) – Ts (n) : Varied room temp. value  
n – 1 Counts of detection of 90 seconds before  
3) Heating operation  
:
Every 1 minute (60 sec.), the room temperature differ-  
ence between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the  
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain  
the correction value of the frequency command and then  
the present frequency command is corrected.  
Ts (n) – Ta (n)  
n
: Room temp. difference  
: Counts of detection  
Ta (n) – Ta (n – 1): Varied room temp. value  
n – 1  
: Counts of detection of 1 minute before  
4) Dry operation  
The frequency correction control is same as those of the  
cooling operation.  
However the maximum frequency is limited to approxi-  
mately “S6”.  
Note) When LOW is set up, the maximum frequency is  
limited to approximately “SB”.  
5
Automatic  
cooling/heating  
control  
1) The judgment of selecting COOL/HEAT is carried out as  
shown below. When +1.5 exceeds against Tsh 10 minutes  
and after thermo.-OFF, heating operation (Thermo. OFF)  
exchanges to cooling operation. Description in the  
Tsc: Setup temp. in  
cooling operation  
Tsh: Setup temp. in  
heating operation  
+ temp. correction of  
room temp. control  
parentheses shows an example of cooling ON/OFF.  
Ta  
Cooling  
(˚C)  
+1.5  
(Cooling ON)  
Tsc  
or  
Tsh  
(Cooling OFF)  
-1.5  
Heating  
When –1.5 lowers against Tsc 10 minutes and after  
thermo. OFF, cooling operation (Thermo. OFF) exchanges  
to heating operation.  
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of  
cooling/heating, see Item 4.  
3) For temperature correction of room temp. control in  
automatic heating, see Item 3.  
– 47 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
Air speed selection 1) Operation with (HH), (H), (L) or [AUTO] mode is carried  
out by the command from the remote controller.  
HH > H+ > H > L+ >  
L > UL  
(2) When the air speed mode [AUTO] is selected, the air  
speed varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.  
<COOL>  
Ta (˚C)  
A
+3.0  
HH  
B
C
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
Tsc  
(HH)  
H+ (HH)  
H (HH)  
L+ (H+)  
L (H)  
D
E
L (H)  
F
–0.5  
L (L+)  
G
• Controlling operation in case when thermo of remote  
controller works is same as a case when thermo of the  
body works.  
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed  
for 3 minutes. However when the air volume is exchanged,  
the air speed changes.  
• When cooling operation has started, select a downward  
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.  
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the  
air speed does not change.  
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
cooling operation.  
<HEAT>  
Ta (˚C)  
L (L+)  
(–0.5) –1.0  
E
L+ (H)  
(0) Tsh  
H (H+)  
(+0.5) +1.0  
D
H+  
(HH)  
(+1.0) +2.0  
C
HH  
(HH)  
(+1.5) +3.0  
B
A
(+2.0) +4.0  
Value in the parentheses indicates one when thermostat of  
the remote controller works.  
Value without parentheses indicates one when thermostat of  
the body works.  
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed  
for 1 minute. However when the air speed I exchanged, the  
air speed changes.  
• When heating operation has started, select an upward  
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.  
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the  
air speed does not change.  
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
heating operation.  
Tc: Indoor heat  
exchanger sensor  
temperature  
• In Tc 60°C, the air speed increases by 1 step.  
– 48 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
Air speed  
selection  
(Continued)  
Standard  
0
Type 1  
1
Type 3  
3
Type 6  
6
Item code  
[5d]  
Selection of high ceiling  
type  
SW501 (1)/(2)  
OFF/OFF  
ON/OFF  
OFF/ON  
ON/ON  
Item code:  
Tap  
F1  
HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL  
HH HH HH HH  
[5d] or selection of high  
ceiling on P.C. board  
SW501  
F2  
HH  
HH  
H+, H H+, H  
L+, L L+, L  
F3  
H+ H+, H H+, H  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
H+  
H
HH  
H
HH  
H+  
L+  
L
L+  
L
H+  
H
L+  
L
H
L+  
L
L+  
L
L+  
L
UL  
UL  
UL  
UL  
SM56  
SM80  
SM110  
SM140  
Tap  
Revolution speed (rpm)  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
610  
550  
500  
450  
400  
390  
370  
350  
340  
330  
320  
310  
250  
630  
590  
530  
470  
450  
440  
410  
380  
370  
350  
330  
320  
250  
700  
670  
660  
640  
620  
610  
550  
490  
480  
450  
400  
400  
300  
700  
670  
660  
650  
640  
630  
560  
490  
480  
460  
430  
420  
300  
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if thermostat  
is turned off.  
4) If Ta 25°C when heating operation has started and when  
defrost operation has been cleared, the air conditioner  
operates with (H) mode or higher mode for 1 minute after Tc  
entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive control  
(Item 7).  
5) In automatic cooling/heating operation, the revolution  
frequency of (HH) is set larger than that in the standard  
cooling/heating operation.  
However only when the  
high ceiling selection is  
set to [Standard]  
However the revolution  
F5 F4  
Ta  
frequency is restricted in  
the automatic heating  
operation as shown in  
the following figure.  
(˚C)  
47  
42  
F5  
6) Dry clean operation  
[DRY] is displayed.  
When performing dry operation after stopping the cooling  
operation, the mode becomes [UL] (210 rpm).  
– 49 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
7
Cool air discharge  
preventive control  
1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled  
In D and E zones, the  
based on the detected temperature of Tc sensor or priority is given to air  
Tcj sensor. As shown below, the upper limit of the  
revolution frequency is restricted.  
volume selection setup  
of remote controller.  
However B zone is assumed as C zone for  
6 minutes and after when the compressor  
activated.  
In A zone while thermo  
is ON, [PRE-HEAT  
(Heating ready)] is  
displayed.  
In defrost operation, the control value of Tc is  
shifted by 6°C.  
Tc  
(˚C)  
Tcj  
HH  
32  
H
30  
L
E zone  
28  
UL  
D zone  
26  
OFF  
C zone  
B zone  
A zone  
20  
16  
8
Freeze preventive control 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is  
Tcj:  
(Low temperature release)  
performed as follows based on the detected  
temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
Indoor heat exchanger  
sensor temperature  
When [J] zone is detected for 6 minutes (Following  
figure), the commanded frequency is decreased  
from the real operation frequency. After then the  
commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds  
while operation is performed in [J] zone.  
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the  
operation is held.  
When [ I ] zone is detected, the timer is cleared  
and the operation returns to the normal operation.  
If the commanded frequency becomes S0  
because the operation continues in [J] zone, the  
return temperature A is raised from 5°C to 12°C  
until [ I ] zone is detected and the indoor fan  
operates with [L] mode.  
(˚C)  
A
5
I
K
2
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control  
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the  
following conditions are satisfied.  
(However the temperature for J zone dashing  
control is changed from 2°C to –5°C.)  
Tcn:  
Tc temperature when 5  
minutes elapsed after  
activation  
Tc (n – 1):  
<Conditions>  
Tc temperature at start  
time  
• When  
or  
is established 5 minutes after  

activation.  
Tcn Tc (n – 1) – 5  

Tcn < Tc (n – 1) – 1 and Tcn Ta < 5°C  
– 50 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
9
High-temp.  
release control  
1) The heating operation is performed as follows based on the  
detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
• When [M] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is  
decreased from the real operation frequency. After then  
the commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds  
while operation is performed in [M] zone.  
However this control is  
ignored in case of the  
follower unit of the twin.  
• In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.  
• When [L] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is  
returned to the original value by approx. 6Hz every 60  
seconds.  
Tc(˚C)  
Setup at shipment  
M
N
Tcj  
A
B
Control temp. (°C)  
A
B
56 (54)  
52 (52)  
L
NOTE:  
Same status as that  
when “thermostat-OFF”  
(status that the air  
When the operation has started or when Tc or Tcj < 30°C at  
start of the operation or after operation start, temperature is  
controlled between values in parentheses of A and B.  
conditioner enters in the  
room temp. monitor  
mode when the  
temperature reached the  
setup temperature on  
the remote controller)  
10 Drain pump  
control  
1) In cooling operation (including Dry operation), the drain  
pump is usually operated.  
2) If the float switch works while drain pump drives, the  
compressor stops, the drain pump continues the operation,  
and a check code is output.  
Check code [P10]  
3) If the float switch works while drain pump stops, the  
compressor stops and the drain pump operates. If the float  
switch keeps operating for approx. 4 minutes, a check code  
is output.  
4) If the humidifier “Provided” is judged, compressor [ON], fan  
[ON] and TC sensor value > 33°C, the drain pump operates.  
11 After-heat  
elimination  
When heating operation stops, in some cases, the indoor fan  
operates with (L) for approx. 30 seconds.  
[Dry operation  
displayed.  
] is  
– 51 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
12 Louver 1) Louver position setup  
control  
The louver position at  
horizontal discharge  
position at under  
SM80 differs from  
that at over SM110.  
• When the louver position is changed, the position moves necessarily  
to downward discharge position once to return to the set position.  
• The louver position can be set up in the following operation range.  
In cooling/dry operation  
In heating/fan operation  
• In group twin/triple operation, the louver positions can be set up  
collectively or individually.  
2) Swing setup  
The swinging louver  
moves usually up to  
the ceiling side from  
the louver position of  
the set time.  
• [SWING] is displayed and the following display is repeated.  
In all operations  
(Repeats)  
• In group twin operation, the louver positions can be set up collec-  
tively or individually.  
3) When the unit stopped or the warning was output, the louver is  
automatically set to full closed position.  
4) When PRE-HEAT  
(Heating ready) is displayed (Heating operation  
started or defrost operation is performed), heating thermo is off or self-  
cleaning is performed, the louver is automatically set to horizontal  
discharge position.  
The louver which air direction is individually set or the locked louver  
closes fully when the unit stops and the louver is automatically set to  
horizontal discharge position when PRE-HEAT  
(Heating ready) is  
displayed, heating thermo is off or self-cleaning is performed.  
<<Individual air direction setup>>  
UNIT LOUVER  
Setup from the  
• Pushing  
Louver select button enables every discharge port to  
remote controller  
set up the air direction.  
UNIT  
without  
LOUVER button  
• In case of no input (key operation) for approx. 5 seconds during setting of  
individual air direction (during displaying of louver No. on the remote  
controller screen), the remote controller screen returns to the normal  
display screen.  
is unavailable.  
For the setup opera-  
tion, refer to  
“How to set up louver  
individually” of Item  
“Setup at local site/  
Others”.  
• For the air direction illustration during normal operation, the air direction  
of the least No. among the louvers which are block-set is displayed.  
• While individual air direction is being set, the remote controller operation  
(Illustration of air direction) and operation of the real machine are linked.  
UNIT LOUVER  
• When selecting a case,  
louver No. is not displayed, the air directions of all the louvers are  
collectively set up.  
Louver select button is not pushed or  
Using same as the  
present 4-way Air  
Discharge Cassette  
Type is possible  
[02]  
[03]  
[01]  
E-box  
Refrigerant pipe  
[04]  
Drain pipe  
– 52 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
12 Louver control <<Selection of Swing mode>>  
(Continued)  
• For the Swing mode, the following three types of modes are  
SWING/FIX  
selectable and settable by keeping Swing/Direction  
button pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
On the remote control-  
ler before the wired  
remote controller  
(RBC-AMT31E), the  
mode cannot be moved  
Standard (4 pieces: same phase) swing  
Data: [0001 (At shipment)]  

to the select mode  
SWING/FIX  
When Swing operation is selected, four louvers align at the  
horizontal discharge position and then start the Swing  
operation at the same time.  
even if pushing  
button for a long time.  
Dual swing Data: [0002]  
Carry out setting  
operation during stop of  
the unit; otherwise the  
unit stops operation.  
When operation is selected, the louvers of louver No. [01]  
and [03] move to the horizontal discharge position, the  
louvers of louver No. [02] and [04] move to the downward  
discharge position and then start the Swing operation at the  
same time.  
The standard swing  
performs the same  
swing operation as the  
present operation  
(2 series).  
Cycle swing Data: [0003]  
ƒ
When operation is selected, the louver No. [01] moves to the  
horizontal discharge position, [03] to the downward dis-  
charge position, [02] and [04] to the middle position and  
then start the Swing operation at the same time.  
For the setting opera-  
tion, refer to [How to  
set up type of the  
swings] in Item “Setup  
at local site/Others”.  
• Three types of the swing modes can be also selected and set  
by the setup data of Item code (DN) [F0].  
• In case of selecting the Swing mode, “Dual swing” or “Cycle  
swing”, the following numerals is displayed at the center of the  
SWING/FIX  
remote controller screen for approx. 3 seconds when  
button was pushed to select [SWING].  
(No display for the standard swing)  
On the remote control-  
ler before the wired  
remote controller  
(RBC-AMT31E),  
flashing showing the  
Swing mode is not  
indicated.  
Alternate lighting  
(0.5 sec.)  
Alternate lighting  
(0.5 sec.)  
Cycle swing  
Dual swing  
<<Louver lock (Louver fix)>>  
• For the air direction setup for each discharge port, the louver  
position can be locked during the normal operation.  
On the remote control-  
ler before the wired  
remote controller  
• An arbitrary air direction of an arbitrary louver can be  
UNIT LOUVER  
(RBC-AMT31E),  
registered and set by keeping  
button pushed for  
UNIT LOUVER  
button is not  
4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
provided.  
• The louver lock can be set by registering the setup data to Item  
code (DN) [F1] to [F4] according to the following table.  
Carry out setting  
operation during stop  
of the unit; otherwise  
the unit stops opera-  
Item code Objective louver No.  
Setup data  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
01  
02  
03  
04  
0000: Release (At shipment)  
0001: Horizontal discharge position  
~
0005: Downward discharge position  
– 53 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
] goes on the remote  
Remarks  
12 Louver control • If there is the locked louver in the unit, [  
For the setting  
operation, refer to  
[How to set louver  
lock] of Installation  
Manual.  
controller screen.  
(Continued)  
• While the following controls are performed, the louvers operate  
even if executing the louver lock.  
Control which ignores lock  
Operation stop  
Objective louver No.  
Full-close position  

ƒ
When heating operation started  
Heating thermo. OFF  
During defrost operation  
Initialize operation  
Horizontal discharge position  
Horizontal discharge position  
Horizontal discharge position  
Full-close position  
It is position check  
operation and it does  
not link with the real  
louver and air  
Self-clean operation  
Horizontal discharge position  
direction setup  
• The real louver corresponding to the louver No. displayed on the  
remote controller screen during setting of louver lock operates  
swinging.  
(Illustration on the  
remote controller  
screen).  
<<Selection of horizontal discharge position>>  
• For the horizontal discharge position, selection of the cold draft-  
less (Control for cold air draft) position and smudging-less  
(Control for smudge of ceiling) position is available.  
• Although “Smudging-less” position has been set at shipment from  
the factory, Cold draft-less” position can be selected by changing  
[0000 (At shipment)] to [0002] on the Item code (DN) [45].  
To realize “360° discharge”, it is necessary to set “cold draft-less”  
position.  
If selecting the cold  
draft-less position,  
effect of the smudg-  
ing-less weakens.  
• When using the optional part “Height adjustment spacer” or  
installing the unit at position where there is no ceiling, it is  
recommended to set DN Item code [45] to [0002] to use it at “cold  
draft-less” position.  
13 HA control  
1) This control is connected to TV control or remote start/stop I/F,  
etc, and start/stop are available by HA signal input from the  
remote position.  
In the group opera-  
tion, use this control  
by connecting to  
either master or  
follower indoor unit.  
2) This control outputs start/stop status to HA output terminal.  
3) I/O specifications conform to JEMA regulations.  
4) This control outputs [Operation OFF (STOP) signal] to HA output  
terminal while self-cleaning works. However selection of [Operation  
ON (Operating) signal] is possible by changing [0000 (At ship-  
ment)] of Item code (DN) [CC] to [0001]. In this case, if HA is input  
during self-clean operation during operation of the air conditioner,  
the self-clean operation is not performed. (Unit stops.)  
14 Frequency  
fixed operation  
(Test run)  
<In case of wired remote controller>  
Command frequency  
is approximately [S7]  
1) When pushing [CHK] button for 4 seconds or more, [TEST] is  
displayed on the display screen and the mode enters in Test run  
mode.  
2) Push [ON/OFF] button.  
3) Using [MODE] button, set the mode to [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.  
• During test run operation, the temperature cannot be adjusted.  
• An error is detected as usual.  
• A frequency fixed operation is performed.  
4) After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the operation.  
(Display in the display part is same as the procedure in Item 1.)  
5) Push [CHK] button to clear the test run mode.  
([TEST] display in the display part disappears and the status  
returns to the normal stop status.)  
– 54 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
[FILTER ] goes on.  
15 Filter sign display  
(Except wireless  
type)  
1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the filter  
reset signal is sent to the remote controller when the speci-  
fied time (2500H) has passed, and it is displayed on LCD.  
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the  
remote controller, time of the calculation timer is cleared.  
In this case, the measurement time is reset if the specified  
time has passed, and display on LCD disappears.  
16 Central control  
mode selection  
1) Setting at the centerl controller side enables to select the  
contents which can be operated on the remote controller at  
indoor unit side.  
2) Setup contents  
• 64 line central controller (TCB-SC642TLE2)  
Display at remote  
controller side  
(No display)  
[Individual]: Operated on the remote controller  
(Priority to second pushing)  
[Central 1]: ON/OFF operation cannot be operated on  
the remote controller.  
[Central  
] goes on  
[Central 2]: ON/OFF, mode selection, temp. setup  
operations cannot be operated on the remote  
controller.  
[Central  
] goes on  
[Central 3]: Mode selection and temp. setup operations  
cannot be operated on the remote controller.  
[Central  
[Central  
] goes on  
] goes on  
[Central 4]: Mode selection cannot be operated on the  
remote controller.  
* In case of the wireless type, the display lamp does not  
change but the contents are same. If operating an item  
which is prohibited by the central control mode from the  
remote controller, it is notified with the receive sound,  
Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi (5 times).  
17 Energy-saving  
control  
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to be  
operated.  
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the range  
not to lose the comfort ability according to input values of  
various sensors.  
3) Data (Input value room temp. Ta, Outside temp. To, Air  
volume, Indoor heat exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for  
20 minutes are taken the average to calculate correction  
value of the setup temperature.  
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes, and the  
shifted range is as follows.  
In cooling time: +1.5 to – 1.0K  
In heating time: –1.5 to +1.0K  
18 Max. frequency  
cut control  
1) This control is operated by selecting [AUTO] operation mode.  
2) COOL operation mode: It is  
controlled according to the following  
figure if To < 28°C.  
3) HEAT operation mode: It is controlled  
according to the following figure if  
To > 15°C.  
Max. frequency is  
restricted to approximately  
the rated heating frequency  
Ta(˚C)  
Ta(˚C)  
Tsh  
Normal control  
+4  
+3  
–3  
–4  
Tsc  
Normal control  
Max. frequency is  
restricted to approximately  
the rated cooling frequency  
– 55 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
19 DC motor  
1) When the fan operation has started, positioning of the  
stator and the rotor are performed.  
(Moves slightly with tap sound)  
2) The motor operates according to the command from the  
indoor controller.  
Notes)  
• When the fan rotates while the air conditioner stops due to  
entering of outside air, etc, the air conditioner may operate  
while the fan motor stops.  
• When a fan lock is found, the air conditioner stops, and an  
error is displayed.  
Check code [P12]  
20 Self-clean operation  
(Dry operation)  
1) When cooling operation mode (AUTO COOL, COOL, DRY) stopped, the following  
three dry operations are performed.  
Compressor  
ON period  
Self-clean  
operation period  
FAN  
Drain pump  
Louver  
0 to 10 min.  
10 to 60 min.  
60 min. to  
None  
1 hour  
2 hours  
Fan (UL)  
STOP  
Horizontal discharge position  
2) During operation of self-clean,  
lights on the wired  
On the remote  
remote controller screen. However the operation lamp  
(Green LED) goes off.  
controller before the  
wired remote control-  
ler (RBC-AMT31E),  
Dry operation display  
is not output. And it is  
not also on the  
3) To stop the self-clean operation, push twice the [ON/OFF]  
button on the remote controller continuously. (Stop the  
operation as compressor ON time in the table above: 10  
minutes or below.)  
wireless remote  
controller.  
4) When the follower unit executes self-clean operation in the  
group connection, the segment of  
is displayed on the  
It is recognized as  
[STOP] from the  
remote monitor side.  
wired remote controller screen via master unit.  
If self-clean operation is not used, set invalidity (does  
not use) of the self-clean operation by changing [0001  
(At shipment) of Item code (DN) [D3] to [0000].  
To erase the  
display during operation of self-clean,  
change Item code [D4] from [0000: Display  
(At shipment)] to [0001: Non-display].  
SAVE  
21 Save operation  
1) Turn on  
2) During operation of save operation,  
wired remote controller.  
button on the remote controller.  
Display is not output  
on the remote  
controller before the  
wired remote control-  
ler (RBC-AMT31E).  
SAVE  
lights on the  
3) During save operation, the current release control is  
performed with the restriction ratio set in EEPROM on the  
Carry out setting  
operation during stop  
of the unit; otherwise  
the unit stops opera-  
tion.  
outdoor unit.  
SAVE  
4) The restriction ratio can be set by keeping  
button  
pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
5) When validating the save operation, the next operation  
starts with save operation valid because contents are  
held even when operation stops, operation mode changes  
or power supply is reset.  
For the setup opera-  
tion, refer to “How to  
set up contents of  
save operation” of  
Installation Manual.  
6) The restriction ratio can be set by changing the setup  
data of Item code (DN) [C2] in the range of 50 to 100%  
(every 1%, Setting at shipment: 75%).  
– 56 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
22 8°C heating/  
Frost protective  
operation  
1) This functional is intended for the cold latitudes and performs  
objective heating operation (8°C heating operation).  
2) This function is valid only for combination with the outdoor  
units (Super Digital Inverter (SDI) 4-series outdoor units).  
In a group connection,  
if there is even one  
combination with other  
unit, “This function is not  
provided.is displayed.  
3) Using the indoor DN code [D1] (1 bit), Valid/Invalid of this  
function is set up at the customer’s side.  
The setup by DN code is Invalid [0]/Valid [1] and Invalid [0]  
has been set at the shipment.  
4) This operation is the heating operation which sets +8°C as  
the setup temperature of the target.  
The setup temperature  
jumps from [18] to [8].  
5) This function starts operation by pushing temperature  
button during heating operation; besides by pushing  
button for 4 seconds or more after temperature  
reached the minimum set temperature.  
6) To stop/release this operation, select and execute one from  
the following operations.  
Push  
continues.  
button: Heating operation (18°C setting)  

ƒ
Push [START/STOP] button: Air conditioner stops.  
(Heating 18°C operation at the next start)  
MODE  
Push  
operation continues.  
: Other operation mode is selected and the  
7) As the setup temperature is +8°C and the human heating is  
not targeted, the cold air discharge preventive control (Item 7)  
is made invalid to suppress the intermittent operation.  
8) The settings of the air direction and air volume are  
changeable during this operation.  
9) The indoor fan stops to protect the compressor for  
2 minutes after start of heating operation (Thermo-ON) by  
this function.  
– 57 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Connector No.  
Pin No.  
Specifications  
Remarks  
Humidifier output is ON when heating operation is performed, when thermostat is on, when the fan is on.  
The setting of Humidifier provided + Drain pump ON is performed by short-circuit of CN70 or from the  
remote controller. (DN [40] = 0001)  
1
2
1
2
DC12V  
Humidifier output ()  
CN66  
Output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Setting at shipment: Interlock of ON by indoor unit operation, with OFF by stop operation  
The single operation setting by FAN button on the remote controller is performed on the remote  
controller (DN [31] = 0000 0001)  
Ventilation output  
CN32  
CN61  
Output (Open collector)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
ON/OFF input  
HA ON/OFF input (J01:YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment from factory) /Static input selection)  
0V  
Remote controller prohibited input  
Operation output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Permission/Prohibition of remote controller operation stop is performed by input.  
Operation ON (Answer back of HA)  
HA  
Warning output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
Warning output ON  
Defrost output (Open collector)  
ON when outdoor unit is defrosted  
Thermostat ON output (Open collector) ON when real thermostat is on. (Compressor ON)  
Option output  
CN60  
Cooling output (Open collector)  
Heating output (Open collector)  
Fan output (Open collector)  
DC12V  
ON when operation mode is cooling system (COOL, DRY, Cooling/Heating automatic cooling)  
ON when operation mode is heating system (HEAT, Cooling/Heating automatic heating)  
ON when indoor fan is on. (When air cleaner is used) OFF while clean operation is performed.  
Outside error input  
CN80  
CN20  
NC  
Generate the warning code “L30” (continuously for 1 minute) and stop the operation forcibly.  
Outside error input  
DC12V  
Panel operation input  
Panel up output (Open collector)  
Panel down output (Open collector)  
0V  
The grille is controlled according to up/down operation from the remote controller.  
Setting of automatic up/down grille provided is performed on the remote controller.  
(DN [30] = 0000 0001)  
AUTO up/down grille  
()  
Selection of option error input (Protective operation display of device attached to outside) or Humidifier  
setting input (Vaporizing + Drain pump ON)  
Humidifier is set at shipment from factory.  
1
2
FILTER  
Option error /  
Humidifier setting ()  
CN70  
0V  
0V  
Setting of option error input is performed on the remote controller. (DN [2A] = 0002 0001)  
1
2
1
2
1
2
CHK  
Operation check  
This check is used to check indoor operation. (Performs operation of indoor fan “H”, Louver horizontal  
and Drain pump ON without communication with outdoor and remote controller)  
CN71  
CN72  
CN73  
DISP  
Exhibition mode  
Communication is available by indoor unit and remote controller only.  
Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation  
0V  
Demand input  
0V  
EXCT  
Demand  
This option is not provided to oversea models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4. Indoor Print Circuit Board  
<MCC-1570>  
– 59 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS  
8-1. Outdoor Controls  
8-1-1. Print Circuit Board  
<Viewed from parts of P.C board>  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E  
RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
<MCC-1571>  
Fan motor output  
(Lower side)  
CN300 (White)  
Fan motor output  
Compressor output terminal  
Electrolytic  
condenser  
(Upper side)  
CN202  
CN201  
CN200  
CN400 (White)  
Case thermostat connector  
CN609 (Blue)  
Power supply circuit protective fuse  
F100 250V, 3.15A, Plastic case)  
4-way valve connector  
CN701 (White)  
Compressor ON output connector  
CN704 (Blue)  
Heater output connector  
CN610 (Gray)  
Lead wire  
for grounding  
P09 (Black)  
Outside input connector  
CN610 (Yellow)  
Specific operation switch  
SW801  
SW804  
Display select switch  
SW800  
SW803  
Temp. sensor connector  
TL CN604 (White)  
TD CN603 (White)  
TO CN602 (Yellow)  
TE CN601 (White)  
TS CN600 (White)  
Power-ON, error display LED  
D800 to 804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
PMV connector  
CN710 (White)  
Initial setting switch  
SW802  
Connector  
for reactor  
Conneector  
for reactor  
Indoor/Outdoor communication signal LED  
D503 (Green, Outdoor Indoor)  
D502 (Orange, Indoor Outdoor)  
Inter-unit  
cable connector  
CN04 (White)  
Inter-unit cable  
Power supply  
protective fuse  
protective fuse  
F03 (250V, 25A)  
F01 (250V, 25A)  
4-way valve protective fuse  
F700 (250V, 3.15A, Plastic case)  
Lead wire for connection of power supply  
P01 (Red)  
P02 (White)  
– 60 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2. Outline of Main Controls  
1. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) control  
1) PMV is controlled between 30 and 500 pulsed during operation.  
2) In cooling operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and  
TC sensor aiming 1 to 4K as the target value.  
3) In heating operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and  
TE sensor aiming –1 to 4K as the target value.  
4) When the cycle excessively heated in both cooling and heating operation, PMV is controlled by TD  
sensor. The target value is usually 91°C in cooling operation and 96°C in heating operation.  
REQUIREMENT  
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the  
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance  
value or the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.  
2. Discharge temperature release control  
1) When the discharge temperature did not fall or the discharge temperature rapidly went up by PMV  
control, this control lowers the operation frequency. It subdivides the frequency control up to 0.6Hz to  
stabilize the cycle.  
2) When the discharge temperature detected an abnormal stop zone, the compressor stops and then  
restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
The error counting is cleared when the operation continued for 10 minutes. If the error is detected by  
4 times without clearing, the error is determined and restarting is not performed.  
The cause is considered as excessively little amount of refrigerant, PMV error or clogging of the cycle.  
3) For displayed contents of error, confirm on the check code list.  
TD [˚C]  
Abnormal stop  
111  
Frequency normal down  
109  
Frequency slow down  
106  
Frequency hold  
103  
Frequency slow up  
(Up to command)  
96  
As command is  
– 61 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Outdoor fan control  
Revolution frequency allocation of fan taps [rpm]  
W1  
W2  
W3  
W4  
W5  
W6  
W7  
W8  
W9  
WA  
WB WC WD  
WE  
Up  
200 240 240 260 320 380 480 500 530 610 640 660 720 780  
200 280 360 400 500 520 550 630 660 700 740 820  
SP110  
SP140  
Down  
3-1) Cooling fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TL sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.  
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (14 taps).  

Only for 60 seconds after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the  
zone in the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TL sensor.  
TL [˚C]  
20 Hz  
20Hz  
45Hz  
WE tap  
or lower  
to 45Hz  
or higher  
Temp. range  
58  
55  
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.  
38°C TO  
W6  
WC  
WB  
W8  
W6  
W4  
W3  
W2  
WC  
W8  
WC  
WA  
WD  
WC  
WC  
WA  
W8  
W6  
W6  
WD  
29°C TO < 38°C W5  
W7 WCW9  
+1 tap / 20 sec  
Up to the maximum  
revolution frequency of each zone  
15°C TO < 29°C W4  
W6  
W5  
W4  
W3  
W1  
W1  
WA  
W8  
W6  
W5  
W4  
WC  
W8  
W7  
W5  
W4  
W2  
W2  
5°C TO < 15°C  
0°C TO < 5°C  
–4°C TO < 0°C  
TO < –4°C  
W3  
W2  
W2  
W1  
W1  
38  
35  
Revolution frequency hold  
–1 tap / 20 sec  
Up to the minimum  
revolution frequency of each zone  
TO error  
: WB for SP110  
3-2) Heating fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.  
(Control from minimum W1 to maximum (according to the following table))  

For 3 minutes after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the zone in  
the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TE sensor.  
When TE 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the  
compressor stops.  
TE [˚C]  
ƒ
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Up to W1)  
Stop timer count  
It is the same status as the normal thermostat-  
OFF without error display. The compressor  
restarts after approx. 2 minutes 30 seconds and  
this intermittent operation is not abnormal.  
24  
21  
18  
15  
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Up to W1)  
–1 tap / 20 sec. (Up to W1)  
Revolution frequency hold  
In case that the status in item  
frequently, stain on filter of the suction part of the  
indoor unit is considered.  
generates  
ƒ
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.  
+1 tap / 20 sec  
(Up to the maximum tap of each zone)  
Object: SP140  
Object: SP110  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
20 Hz  
or lower  
20Hz  
to 45Hz  
45Hz  
or higher  
Temp. range  
Temp. range  
Max.  
W7  
Max.  
W8  
Max.  
W9  
Max.  
W7  
Max.  
W8  
Max.  
W9  
10°C TO  
5°C TO < 10°C  
–3°C TO < 5°C  
–10°C TO < –3°C  
TO < –10°C  
10°C TO  
W9  
WA  
WB  
WC  
WD  
WD  
WB  
WC  
WC  
WD  
WD  
5°C TO < 10°C  
–3°C TO < 5°C  
–10°C TO < –3°C  
TO < –10°C  
W9  
WA  
WA  
WB  
WD  
WD  
WA  
WB  
WB  
WD  
WD  
WB  
WC  
WD  
WD  
WA  
WB  
WD  
WD  
TO error  
TO error  
– 62 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Coil heating control  
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case  
heater. It purposes to prevent stagnation of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.  
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation;  
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.  
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting  
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted and left as it is for a long time.  
3) A judgment for electricity is performed by TD and TO sensors.  
If TO sensor is defective, a backup control is automatically performed by TE sensor.  
For a case of defective TO sensor, judge it with outdoor LED display.  
4) For every model, the power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.  
(Normal time)  
(In defective TO sensor)  
TO  
TE  
18˚C  
20˚C  
No power  
No power  
15˚C  
10˚C  
8˚C  
18˚C  
12˚C  
10˚C  
Intermittent power-ON  
Intermittent power-ON  
10 minutes: ON /  
5 minutes: OFF  
Output  
• Power-ON  
condition  
TD<30˚C  
• Power-ON  
condition  
TD < 30˚C  
10 minutes: ON /  
5 minutes: OFF  
Output  
[40W or equivalent]  
[40W or equivalent]  
Continuous power-ON  
Output  
[40W or equivalent]  
Continuous power-ON  
Output  
[40W or equivalent]  
REQUIREMENT  
While heating the coil, the power sound may be heard. However it is not a trouble.  
5. Short intermittent operation preventive control  
1) For 3 to 10 minutes after operation start, in some cases, the compressor does not stop to protect the  
compressor even if receiving the thermostat-OFF signal from indoor. However it is not abnormal status.  
(The operation continuance differs according to the operation status.)  
2) When the operation stops by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.  
6. Current release control  
No. of revolutions of the compressor is controlled by AC current value detected by T620 on the outdoor P.C.  
board so that the input current of the inverter does not exceed the specified value.  
Current [A]  
SP110 / SP140  
Objective model  
Frequency down  
COOL  
HEAT  
I1 value [A]  
20.0  
20.0  
I1  
Hold  
Hold  
I1–1.0  
Normal operation  
– 63 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Current release control value (I1)  
7. Current release value shift control  
[A]  
1) This control purposes to prevent troubles of  
the electronic parts such as the compressor  
driving elements and the compressor during  
cooling operation.  
Temperature range  
44°C To  
SP110, SP140  
15.0  
17.7  
20.0  
15.0  
39°C To < 44°C  
To < 39°C  
2) The current release control value (I1) is  
selected from the following table according to  
TO sensor value.  
TO error  
8. Over-current protective control  
1) When the over-current protective circuit detected an abnormal current, stop the compressor.  
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds setting [1] as an error count.  
3) When the error count [8] was found, determine an error and restart operation is not performed.  
4) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.  
9. High-pressure release control  
1) The operation frequency is controlled to restrain abnormal rising of high pressure by TL sensor in  
cooling operation and TC sensor in heating operation.  
2) When TL sensor in cooling operation or TC sensor in heating operation detects abnormal temperature of  
the stop zone, stop the compressor and the error count becomes +1.  
3) When the compressor stopped with 2), the operation restarts from the point of the normal operation  
zone (e point or lower) where it returned after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
4) The error count when the compressor stopped with 2) is cleared after the operation continued for 10  
minutes. If the error count becomes [10] without clearing, the error is determined and reactivation is not  
performed.  
5) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.  
HEAT TC / COOL TL  
HEAT  
TC  
COOL  
TL  
[˚C]  
Abnormal stop  
Frequency normal down  
Frequency slow down  
Frequency hold  
a
a
b
c
d
e
62°C  
57°C  
55°C  
53°C  
49°C  
63°C  
62°C  
60°C  
58°C  
54°C  
b
c
d
e
Abnormal stop  
Frequency slow up (Up to command)  
As command is  
– 64 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Defrost control  
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to  
D zone.  
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or higher for 3 seconds or continued  
7°C TE < 12°C for 1 minute.  
The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 10 minutes even if TE sensor temperature was  
7°C or lower.  
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating  
operation starts.  
Start of heating operation  
TE [˚C]  
[min.]  
0
10  
15  
39 45  
55  
d
–2  
–5  
–10  
A zone  
B zone  
D zone  
–23  
C zone  
The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started  
are stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.  
In normal To  
In abnormal To  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 3°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 3°C  
A zone  
B zone  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) 2°C  
When status (TE0 – TE) 2°C  
continued for 20 seconds  
continued for 20 seconds  
C zone  
D zone  
When status (TE –23°C) continued for 20 seconds  
When compressor operation status of TE < –2°C is calculated by d portion  
4) The time of above d can be changed by  
exchanging jumper [J805] and [J806] of the  
outdoor control P.C. board.  
J805  
J806  
d
150 minutes  
Setting at shipment  
¡
¡
(Setting at shipment: 150 minutes)  
90 minutes  
60 minutes  
30 minutes  
×
¡
×
¡
×
×
: Short circuit,  
: Open  
×
¡
– 65 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting  
<Wired remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup tem-  
perature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3. Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4. ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the  
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
b) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
c) Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble  
Confirmation of check code display  
Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE :  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer  
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the  
remote controller to shield cables.  
– 66 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Wireless remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+
and  
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
a) The following operations are normal.  
1. Compressor does not operate.  
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup tem-  
perature?  
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?  
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.  
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
• Is not defrost operation performed?  
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
• Is not forced operation performed?  
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
• Is not automatic address being set up?  
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?  
a) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
b) Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation  
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Confirmation of lamp display  
Check defective  
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type  
wireless remote controller is connected)  
Trouble  
position and parts.  
1) Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving unit)  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
– 67 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2. Troubleshooting  
9-2-1. Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving part)  
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
: Go off,  
: Go on,  
: Flash (0.5 sec.)  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer Ready  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit  
No indication at all  
E01  
E02  
E03  
E08  
E09  
E10  
Receiving error  
Sending error  
Receiving unit  
Miswiring or wire connection error  
between receiving unit and indoor unit  
Communication stop  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Duplicated indoor unit No.  
Setup error  
Duplicated master units of remote controller  
Flash  
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board  
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF  
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main  
and sub indoor twin)  
E18  
Operation Timer  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr  
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)  
E04  
Flash  
Ready  
P10  
P12  
Overflow was detected.  
Protective device of indoor unit worked.  
Indoor DC fan error  
Alternate flash  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P19  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error  
Outdoor high pressure system error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
1  
Negative phase detection error  
Heat sink overheat error  
Gas leak detection error  
Outdoor unit error  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)  
Outdoor unit high pressure protection  
Alternate flash  
Outdoor unit: Outdoor unit error  
Protective device of  
outdoor unit worked.  
Outdoor unit: Inverter Idc operation  
Outdoor unit: Position detection error  
1  
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group  
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)  
P31  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 68 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer  
Check code  
F01  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
Ready  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
F02  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit sensor error  
Alternate flash  
P10  
F04  
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Temp. sensor (TE) error  
F06  
Operation Timer  
Alternate flash  
Ready  
F07  
Temp. sensor (TL) error  
F08  
Temp. sensor (TO) error  
Sensor error of outdoor unit  
1  
Temp. sensor (TS) error  
F12  
Temp. sensor (TH) error  
F13  
Temp. Sensor miswiring (TE, TS)  
F15  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Ready  
F29  
F31  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Outdoor EEPROM error  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer  
Flash  
H01  
H02  
H03  
H04  
H06  
Compressor break down  
Compressor lock  
Ready  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat worked.  
Outdoor compressor system error 1  
Outdoor unit low pressure system error  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Duplicated master indoor units  
There is indoor unit of group connection AUTO address  
in individual indoor unit.  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
* If group construction and  
address are not normal  
when power supply turned on,  
automatically goes to address  
setup mode.  
Unsetting of group address  
Missed setting  
(Unset indoor capacity)  
Simultaneous flash  
L10  
L20  
L29  
L30  
L31  
Unset model type (Service board)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses  
Outdoor unit and other error  
Outside interlock error  
Operation Timer  
Ready  
Others  
Simultaneous flash  
Negative phase error  
1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.  
– 69 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2-2. Others (Other than Check Code)  
Lamp indication  
Operation Timer Ready  
Check code  
Cause of trouble occurrence  
During test run  
Simultaneous flash  
Operation Timer Ready  
Disagreement of cool/heat  
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or  
setting of heating to cooling-only model)  
Alternate flash  
– 70 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2-3. Check Code List (Indoor)  
: Go on,  
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
(Indoor unit detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
Air conditioner operation  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
TCC-LINK central &  
Automatic  
Operation  
Wired remote controller  
reset  
continuation  
Regular communication error between indoor and  
remote controller  
No communication from remote controller and network adapter  
(Also no communication from central control system)  
E03  
¥
¡
×
l
l
E04  
E08  
E10  
Indoor/Outdoor serial error  
Duplicated indoor addresses  
There is error on serial communication between indoor and outdoor units  
Same address as yours was detected.  
¥
l
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
l
¥
¥
l
l
l
²
Communication error between indoor MCU  
Regular communication error between  
indoor master and follower units  
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer  
Regular communication between indoor master and follower units is impossible,  
Communication between twin master (main) and follower (sub) units is impossible.  
E18  
¥
¡
×
l
l
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
L20  
L30  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P19  
P31  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TCJ) error  
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TC) error  
Indoor unit, Room temp. sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit, other indoor P.C. board error  
Duplicated setting of indoor group master unit  
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.  
Unset indoor group address  
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TCJ).  
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TC).  
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/short was detected on room temp. sensor (TA).  
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.  
There are multiple master units in a group.  
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit.  
Indoor group address is unset.  
²
²
²
Unset indoor capacity  
Capacity of indoor unit is unset.  
Duplicated central control system address  
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)  
Indoor unit, AC fan error  
Duplicated setting of central control system address  
Abnormal stop by outside error (CN80) input  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
An error of indoor AC fan was detected. (Fan motor thermal relay worked.)  
Float switch worked.  
Indoor unit, overflow detection  
Indoor unit, DC fan error  
4-way valve system error  
Indoor DC fan error (Over-current/Lock, etc.) was detected.  
In heating operation, an error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger sensor.  
Follower unit in group cannot operate by warning from [E03/L03/L07/L08] of master unit.  
Other indoor unit error  
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.  
²
(Remote controller detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
Air conditioner operation  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
Automatic  
Operation  
Wired remote controller  
reset  
continuation  
No master remote controller, Remote controller  
communication (Receive) error  
Remote controller communication (Send) error  
Signal cannot be received from indoor unit. Master remote controller was not set.  
(including 2 remote controllers)  
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.  
E01  
E02  
E09  
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master. (Indoor master unit stops warning  
and follower unit continues operation.)  
Duplicated master remote controller  
(Central control devices detected)  
Check code indication  
Sensor lamp indication  
Air conditioner operation  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
Representative defective position  
Explanation of error contents  
Automatic  
Operation  
TCC-LINK central  
reset  
continuation  
Signal sending operation of central control system is impossible.  
There are multiple same central devices. (AI-NET)  
Is not displayed.  
(Common use of  
C05  
C06  
C12  
Central control system communication (send) error  
Central control system communication (receive) error  
General-purpose device control interface batched warning  
remote controller, etc.)  
Signal receiving operation of central control system is impossible.  
An error on device connected to general-purpose device control interface of exclusive to  
TCC-LINK/AI-NET  
By warning unit  
(Above-mentioned)  
Group follower unit is defective.  
(For remote controller, above-mentioned [∗∗∗] details are displayed with unit No.  
P30  
Group follower unit is defective.  
NOTE: Even for the same contents of error such as communication error, the display of check code may differ according to detection device.  
When remote controller or central controller detects an error, it is not necessarily related to operation of the air conditioner. In this list, the check codes that outdoor unit detects are not described.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check Code List (Outdoor)  
: Go on,  
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
Sensor lamp part  
Remote  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
controller  
indication  
Block indication  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.  
continuation  
F04  
F06  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor  
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.  
ALT  
F08  
F07  
F12  
F13  
F15  
F31  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error  
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TH) error  
Outdoor unit Misconnection of temp. sensor (TE, TS)  
Outdoor unit EEPROM error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Open/Short of heat sink temp. sensor (Board installed) was detected.  
Misconnection of outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor and suction temp. sensor was detected.  
Outdoor P.C. board part (EEPROM) error was detected.  
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after  
DC excitation was detected.  
H01  
Outdoor unit Compressor break down  
×
×
¥
l
l
H02  
H03  
H04  
L10  
Outdoor unit Compressor lock  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Compressor lock was detected.  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
l
l
¥
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error  
Outdoor unit Case thermostat operation  
Outdoor unit Setting error of service P.C. board type  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation was detected.  
SIM  
SIM  
When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type select jumper setting was inappropriate.  
1) Defective parts on outdoor P.C. board (MCU communication, EEPROM, TH sensor error)  
2) When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type selection was inappropriate.  
3) Other error (Heat sink abnormal overheat, gas leak, 4-way valve inverse error) was detected.  
L29  
Outdoor unit Other outdoor unit error  
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error  
Outdoor  
¥
¡
¥
×
×
×
×
×
×
P03  
P04  
ALT  
ALT  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.  
When case thermostat worked, error was detected by high release control from indoor/  
outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor. Power supply voltage error  
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
Outdoor unit  
High pressure system error, Power supply voltage error  
P05  
P07  
P15  
P20  
P22  
P26  
P29  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Power supply error  
Outdoor unit Heat sink overheat  
Gas leak detection  
Outdoor unit High pressure system error  
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error  
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation  
Outdoor unit Position detection error  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Power supply voltage error  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Abnormal overheat was detected by outdoor heat sink temp. sensor.  
Abnormal overheat of discharge temp. or suction temp. was detected.  
Error was detected by high release control from indoor/outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor.  
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.  
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.  
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.  
No remote controller master unit  
Remote controller communication error  
Signal was not received from indoor unit.  
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)  
E01  
E02  
E03  
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller send error  
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.  
Regular communication error between indoor and  
remote controller  
Indoor  
No communication from remote controller and network adapter  
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04  
E08  
Indoor/Outdoor serial error  
Duplicated indoor addresses  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor  
Same address as yours was detected.  
¡
¡
l
¥
²
Remote  
controller  
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.  
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)  
E09  
E10  
E18  
Duplicated main remote controllers  
Communication error between CPU  
Regular communication error between master and  
follower indoor units  
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Indoor  
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer  
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.  
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.  
There are multiple master units in a group.  
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit  
Indoor address group was unset.  
Indoor  
×
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
L30  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
SIM  
Duplicated indoor master units  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
²
l
l
l
l
¡
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.  
Unset indoor group address  
²
²
Unset indoor capacity  
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)  
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.  
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
P19  
ALT  
4-way valve inverse error  
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up ofTE, TS.  
¡
×
¥
¥
l
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.  
²
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
: Go on,  
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
: Flash, l : Go off  
¡
¥
Sensor lamp part  
Block indication  
Remote  
controller  
indication  
Automatic  
reset  
Operation  
Representative defective position  
Detection  
Explanation of error contents  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.  
continuation  
Operation Timer Ready Flash  
ALT  
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
P01  
P10  
P12  
P31  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error  
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error  
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error  
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
ALT  
ALT  
SIM  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
ALT  
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.  
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.  
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.  
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)  
Float switch worked.  
Indoor unit Overflow detection  
Indoor unit Indoor fan error  
Other indoor unit error  
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.  
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning  
Network  
adapter  
Sub remote controller error in a group  
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)  
By unit with warning No.  
ALT  
Error in indoor group  
Network  
adapter/  
Center  
Communication error of central control system signal  
Is not displayed on the remote controller  
LAN system communication error  
¡
¡
Network  
adapter/  
Center  
L20  
SIM  
LAN system communication error  
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication  
¡
¡
×
¥
¡
¥
Network  
adapter  
There are multiple communication adapters.  
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.  
¡
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by indoor unit  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Check  
code  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.  
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)  
• Central remote controller [97] check code  
No communication from remote  
controller (including wireless) and  
communication adapter  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E03  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
The serial signal is not output from  
outdoor unit to indoor unit.  
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.  
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring  
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.  
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E04  
• Defective serial sending circuit on  
outdoor P.C. board  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
2. When outdoor unit normally operates  
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).  
• Defective serial receiving circuit on  
indoor P.C. board  
E08  
L03  
Duplicated indoor unit address  
Duplicated indoor master unit  
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)  
was changed or not after power supply turned on  
(Finish of group construction/Address check).  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
* If group construction and address are not normal when the  
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to  
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)  
Stop  
There is group wire in individual indoor  
unit.  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Unset indoor group address  
Unset indoor capacity  
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)  
error is detected  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.  
L30  
P10  
Abnormal input of outside interlock  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Trouble of drain pump  
Float switch operation  
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump  
Stop  
• Float circuit, Disconnection,  
Coming-off, Float switch contact error  
error is detected  
3. Check float switch.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Position detection error  
2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P12  
P19  
Indoor DC fan error  
Stop  
Stop  
3. Indoor fan locked.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
1. Check 4-way valve.  
4-way valve system error  
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.  
• After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchangers temp. is  
down.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Own unit stops while warning is output  
to other indoor units.  
Displayed when  
(Follower unit)  
error is detected  
(Automatic reset)  
P31  
F01  
F02  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TCJ)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TC)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of  
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor  
(TA)  
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
F10  
F29  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Indoor EEPROM error  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• EEPROM access error  
2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Communication error between indoor  
MCU  
1. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Displayed when  
E10  
E18  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
• Communication error between fan  
driving MCU and main MCU  
1. Check remote controller wiring.  
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Regular communication error between  
indoor aster and follower units and  
between main and sub units  
Stop  
Displayed when  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
– 74 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Check code  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor  
EEPROM error  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.  
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.  
• Automatic address cannot be completed.  
Not displayed at all  
(Operation on  
remote controller  
is impossible.)  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
5. Check indoor EEPROM.  
(including socket insertion)  
Automatic address repeating phenom-  
enon generates.  
Receiving error from remote controller  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.  
2. Check remote controller.  
No communication with master indoor unit  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
E01  
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between  
remote controller and master indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
If center exists,  
operation continues.  
2  
3. Check indoor power wiring.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Sending error of remote controller  
(Automatic reset)  
Signal send error to indoor unit  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote  
E02  
If center exists,  
operation continues.  
error is detected  
controller.  
Replace remote controller.  
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),  
there are multiple main units.  
Stop  
There are multiple main remote controllers.  
(Detected by remote controller side)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
E09  
L20  
(Sub unit  
Check that there are 1 main remote  
controller and other sub remote controllers.  
continues operation.)  
1. Check setting of central control system  
network address. (Network adapter SW01)  
Duplicated indoor central addresses on  
communication of central control system  
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)  
Stop  
(Automatic reset)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Central controller  
L20  
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
1. Check communication wire / miswiring  
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)  
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
3  
Communication circuit error of central  
control system  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Continues  
Displayed when  
Central controller  
(Send)  
4. Check central controller (such as central  
control remote controller, etc.)  
(By remote controller) error is detected  
C05  
(Receive)  
C06  
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)  
Continuation/Stop  
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding  
error is detected unit from remote controller.  
Indoor Gr sub unit error  
(Detected by central controller side)  
(According  
Central controller  
P30  
to each case)  
2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.  
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)  
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.  
3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and  
[E01], [E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the  
contents.  
– 75 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error mode detected by outdoor unit  
The check code has been ramified from 4 series and after.  
The ramified check code is displayed only when both the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are 4 series and after.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1404UT-E with RAV-SP1404AT-E)  
When the indoor unit is 3 series and before, the conventional check code is displayed.  
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1402BT-E and RAV-SP1404AT-E: Outdoor unit only is 4 series.)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Check code  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Indoor unit  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
before  
after  
3 series 4 series  
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short of discharge  
temp. sensor (TD)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F04  
F06  
F04  
F06  
F07  
F12  
F15  
F08  
Stop  
Stop  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TE)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Check temp. sensor (TL).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TL)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short of suction temp.  
sensor (TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check temp. sensor (TE, TS).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Miss-mounting of outdoor temp.  
sensor (TE, TS)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Disconnection, short of outside temp.  
sensor (TO)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F08  
L29  
Continue  
Disconnection, short of heat sink  
temp. sensor (TH)  
1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
F13  
F31  
L10  
L29  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Outdoor P.C. EEPROM error  
Displayed when 1. Outdoor service P.C. board  
Unset jumper of service P.C. board  
error is detected  
Check model type setting jumper wire.  
Communication error between  
outdoor P.C. board MCU  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Heat sink overheat error  
1. Check screw tightening between PC. Board and heat  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Stop  
sink and check radiator grease.  
P07  
P15  
* Heat sink temp. sensor detected  
over specified temperature.  
2. Check heat sink blast path.  
1. Check gas leak, recharge  
Detection of gas leak  
2. Check full open of service valve.  
* Discharge temp. sensor (TD),  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
Displayed when 3. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
Stop  
error is detected  
4. Check broken pipe.  
5. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
4-way valve inverse error  
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.  
* After heating operation has started,  
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers  
under the specified temp.  
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.  
sensor (TS).  
Displayed when  
P19  
H01  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).  
4. Check 4-way valve coil.  
* After heating operation has started,  
outdoor heat exchanger / suction  
temp. rises over the specified temp.  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
Compressor break down  
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC198 to 264V)  
* Although operation has started,  
operation frequency decreases and  
operation stops.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
H01  
Compressor lock  
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.  
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open phase)  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
H02  
H03  
H02  
H03  
* Over-current detection after  
compressor start-up  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Check outdoor P.C. board. (AC current detection circuit)  
Current detection circuit error  
– 76 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Indoor unit  
Judgment and measures  
Status of  
air conditioner  
Condition  
before  
after  
3 series 4 series  
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)  
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve  
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).  
Discharge temp. error  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P03  
P04  
P03  
Stop  
Discharge temp. (TD) over specified  
value was detected.  
1. Check case thermostat and connector.  
2. Check gas leak, recharge  
Case thermostat operation  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
H04  
P05  
Stop  
Stop  
3. Check full open of service valve.  
4. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
5. Check broken pipe.  
Abnormal overheat of compressor  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V  
Power supply voltage error  
1. Check outdoor heat exchanger sensor (TL).  
2. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC, TCJ).  
3. Check full open of service valve.  
High pressure protective operation  
• During cooling operation, outdoor  
temp. sensor (TL) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
P20  
P22  
Stop  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
4. Check indoor/outdoor fan.  
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).  
• During heating operation, indoor  
temp. sensor (TC, TCJ) detected  
temperature over specified temp.  
6. Check clogging and short circuit of indoor/outdoor heat  
exchanger.  
7. Overcharge of refrigerant. Recharge  
1. Check lock of fan motor.  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P22  
Outdoor fan system error  
2. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V  
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board.  
Short-circuit error of compressor  
driving element  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
P26  
P29  
P26  
P29  
2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor  
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)  
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board.  
error is detected  
Position detection circuit error  
– 77 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2-4. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Indoor Unit)  
Check code  
[E01 error]  
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable  
of remote controller  
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection or  
contact error of connector on harness  
from terminal block of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit wiring.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
YES  
NO  
Check power connection of indoor unit.  
(Turn on power again.)  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Is power supplied to remote controller?  
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V  
Defect Replace  
YES  
YES  
Are 2 remote controllers set  
without master unit?  
Correct a master unit/a follower unit.  
(Remote controller address connector)  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[E09 error]  
YES  
Are 2 master units set in  
2 remote controllers?  
Correct as a master unit  
and a follower unit.  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 78 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E04 error]  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is group address setup of  
remote controller correct?  
Does outdoor operate?  
Check Item code [14].  
YES  
YES  
Are wiring in indoor unit and  
1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables correct?  
Correct wiring and  
inter-unit cables.  
YES  
Correct wiring of connector  
and terminal blocks.  
Are wirings of terminal blocks  
(1, 2, 3) wired to CN04 normal?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash  
after power supply turned on again?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Defect Replace  
[E10 error]  
YES  
Check power supply voltage.  
Correct lines.  
Check and eliminate noise, etc.  
Is there no disorder of power supply?  
NO  
Check indoor control P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 79 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E18 error]  
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable  
of remote controller.  
Is inter-unit cable  
of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection  
or contact error of connector  
on harness from terminal block  
of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit wiring.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
YES  
Check power  
connection status of indoor unit  
(Connect again).  
NO  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Is Twin control?  
YES  
Is there no contact error  
of indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
(Signal line) of the main unit?  
YES  
Correct indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
(Serial signal line).  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]  
E08: Duplicated indoor unit No.  
L03: There are 2 or more master units in a group control.  
L07: There is 1 or more group address [Individual] in a group control.  
L08: The indoor group address is unset. (12. ADDRESS SETUP)  
If the above error is detected when power supply turned on, the mode enters automatically in the automatic  
address set mode. (Check code is not output.)  
However, if the above error is detected during the automatic address set mode, a check code may be  
output.  
[L09 error]  
YES  
Set capacity data of indoor unit.  
(Setup item code (DN)=11)  
Is not yet capacity setting  
of indoor unit set up?  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 80 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[L20 error]  
Are wiring connections  
to communication lines  
U3 and U4 normal?  
NO  
Correct wiring connection.  
YES  
YES  
Is not the multiple same central  
control system addresses connected?  
Correct central control system address.  
NO  
Check central controller  
(including network adapter) and  
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[L30 error]  
NO  
NO  
Are outside devices of  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
connector CN80 connected?  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outside devices.  
Defect Replace  
Do outside devices normally work?  
YES  
Check cause of operation.  
[P30 error] (Central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Is group operation carried out?  
YES  
Is there check code  
on sub remote controller in main  
and sub remote controllers?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Check corresponding  
indoor unit/outdoor unit.  
Defect Replace  
– 81 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[P10 error]  
Is connection of  
NO  
NO  
float switch connector  
(Indoor control board CN34)  
normal?  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
YES  
YES  
Does float switch work?  
YES  
Is circuit wiring normal?  
NO  
Check and correct wiring  
and wire circuit.  
NO  
Does drain pump work?  
YES  
Are connector pins 1 and 2  
at drain pump unit side shorted  
(Resistance value 0)?  
NO  
NO  
Is power of  
drain pump turned on? ∗  
YES  
YES  
Replace drain pump  
and indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Check the drain pipe, etc.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Replace drain pump.  
Check wiring.  
Defect Replace  
Check that voltage of 1-2 pin of CN504 on the indoor P.C. board is +12V. (1 pin is plus (+).)  
[F10 error]  
NO  
Is connection of TA sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TA sensor.  
(CN104 on indoor P.C. board) correct?  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TA sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
Refer to Characteristics-1.  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 82 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[P12 error]  
Turn off the power.  
Is there no connection error or  
disconnection on connectors CN333  
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board  
(MCC-1570)?  
YES  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
CN333  
NO  
Remove connectors CN333  
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
CN334  
NO  
Does the fan rotate without trouble  
when handling the fan with hands?  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
YES  
Are resistance values  
between phases at fan motor connector  
CN333 motor side of indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570) correct? 1  
Incorrect  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
Correct  
1  
• Are not coil windings between  
(Red lead) and  
(Black lead),  
(Red lead) opened or shorted?  
(White lead),  
c
e
between  
between  
(White lead) and  
(Black lead) and  
e
g
g
c
The resistance should be the resistance value below.  
SM56, SM80 Approx. 70 to 100Ω  
SM110, SM140 Approx. 27 to 40Ω  
• Is not grounded between cabinet and  
,
,
. It should be 10Mor more.  
c e g  
Is resistance value of  
Incorrect  
fan motor connector CN334 motor side  
of indoor P.C. board  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
(MCC-1570) correct? 2  
Correct  
2  
Resistance value confirmation of the fan motor position detection circuit  
Is not status between  
The resistance should be approx. 5k to 20k.  
(Yellow lead) and  
(Pink lead) opened or shorted?  
c
d
Is output of  
NO  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
indoor fan motor position  
detection signal correct? 3  
YES  
3  
Confirmation of the fan motor position detection signal  
• Using a voltage tester, measure voltage between CN334  
and  
on the indoor P.C. board  
c
e
(MCC-1570) under condition that CN333 and CN334 are mounted and the power supply is turned on.  
When rotating the fan slowly with hands, the pin voltage should shake between 0 and 5V.  
• Between  
and : 5V  
d
e
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 83 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[F02 error]  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of TC sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TC sensor.  
(CN101 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?  
YES  
Are characteristics of  
TC sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
[F01 error]  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector  
(CN102 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TCJ sensor.  
YES  
Are characteristics of  
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
– 84 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[C06 error] (TCC-LINK central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Are U3 and U4 communication lines normal?  
YES  
Correct communication line.  
1  
Correct connection of connector.  
Is connection of connector normal?  
YES  
1  
TCC-LINK central:  
CN51 of TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440) and CN050 of indoor P.C. board  
NO  
Check connection of A and B terminal blocks.  
Correct communication line of remote controller.  
Are A and B communication lines normal?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Is there no connection error of power supply cable?  
NO  
Correct power wiring.  
Is not the source power supply turned on?  
YES  
Turn on the source power supply.  
YES  
Did a power failure occur?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is the network address changed  
from the remote controller?  
Clear the check code.  
Eliminate noise, etc.  
NO  
Is there no noise source?  
NO  
Uncontrolled  
(Same to others)  
Can the other indoor units  
be normally controlled from the central controller?  
Or is the operation status of indoor unit reflected?  
Check central controller.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Uncontrolled  
Can the indoor unit be normally controlled  
from the remote controller?  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check power supply transformer on  
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440).  
Defect Replace  
– 85 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)  
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller  
(also central controller).  
Check A and B remote controllers and communication lines of the central control system U3 and U4.  
As communication is impossible, this check code [E03] is not displayed on the remote controller and the central  
controller. [E01] is displayed on the remote controller and [C06 error] is displayed on the central controller.  
If these check codes generate during operation, the air conditioner stops.  
[F29 error]  
This check code indicates a detection error of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the indoor unit P.C.  
board, which generated during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.  
When EEPROM was not inserted when power supply turned on or when the EEPROM data read/write  
operation is impossible at all, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, [97 error] is displayed  
on the central controller.  
(Approx.  
3 minutes)  
(Approx.  
1 minute)  
LED (D02) on indoor unit  
P.C. board flashes with  
1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.  
[SET] is displayed  
on remote controller.  
[SET]  
goes off.  
Reboot  
(Reset)  
(Power ON)  
(Repetition)  
[P31 error] (Follower indoor unit)  
When the master unit of a group operation detected [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08] error, the follower unit of the  
group operation detects [P31 error] and then the unit stops.  
There is no display of the check code or alarm history of the remote controller. (In this model, the mode enters  
in automatic address set mode when the master unit detected [L03], [L07] or [L08] error.)  
– 86 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2-5. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)  
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the remote controller.  
2) In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.  
In this case, confirm LED display on the outdoor P.C. board to narrow the contents to be confirmed.  
3) The check code on the remote controller is displayed only when the same error occurred continuously by  
multiple times while LED of the outdoor P.C. board displays even an error which occurred once.  
Therefore the display on the remote controller may differ from that of LED.  
LED display on outdoor P.C. board  
Dip switch setup  
<Latest error display>  
Only 1) of SW803 is ON.  
• When turning on 1) only of SW803, the latest error  
is displayed. As the memory is stored, it can be  
confirmed even if the power supply is turned off  
once. (excluding outside temp. sensor (TO) error)  
• When the work finished or the outdoor temp.  
sensor (TO) error was found, turn off all of SW803.  
(The error which occurs at present is displayed.)  
<Error display, which occurs at present)  
All SW803 are OFF. (Initial status)  
Display selection  
• When even a LED of D800 to D804 (Yellow)  
<Display 1>  
<Display 2>  
ó
(Error occurred) (Push SW800)  
(No error)  
goes on, error occurrence is indicated. <Display 1>  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
• If pushing the button switch SW800 for 1 second  
under the above condition, the yellow LED is  
displayed with flashing. <Display 2>  
• When pushing SW800 for 1 second again, the  
status returns to <Display 1>.  
(Example of discharge temp. sensor error)  
: Go off, : Go on, : Flash  
• The error contents can be confirmed by combining  
<Display 1> and <Display 2>.  
¡
¥
l
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[E04]  
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]  
NO  
Is setting of group address  
of remote controller correct?  
Check Item code [14].  
YES  
NO  
Are inner wiring and  
inter-unit cables (1, 2, 3) normal?  
Correct wiring  
and inter-unit cable.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are CN04 connection and  
Correct wiring of connectors  
and terminal blocks.  
wiring of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) normal?  
YES  
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash after  
power supply is turned on again?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 87 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Is CN603 connection normal?  
Sensor error Replace  
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F06]  
• There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error, Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error,  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error, Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS)  
<Display 1> <Display 2> Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Is CN601 connection normal?  
Sensor error Replace  
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error] Refer to [F07] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] Refer to [F12] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)] Refer to [F15] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
[F07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Is CN604 connection normal?  
Sensor error Replace  
Is resistance value of TL sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 88 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[F08]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Outside air temp. sensor (TO) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN602 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TO sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F12]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN600 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F13] <Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
l
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replac  
[F15] <Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is mounting status of  
Correct sensor mounting.  
TE and TS sensors normal?  
YES  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN600 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?  
YES  
Is CN601 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[F31] <Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error]  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 89 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H01]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor break down]  
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
NO  
Is power supply voltage normal?  
AC198 to 264V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection normal?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
NO  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
Is it not abnormal overload?  
NO  
Correct and clear the cause.  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H02]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor lock]  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO  
NO  
Is power supply voltage normal?  
AC198 to 264V  
Correct power supply line.  
YES  
Is wire connection normal?  
Compressor lead  
(Board side, Compressor side),  
Reactor lead, Power supply lead  
Check wire connection  
and correct it.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Is compressor normal?  
NO  
Defect Replace  
Is there no refrigerant stagnation?  
YES  
Compressor lock Replace  
NO  
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.  
Does PMV normally operate?  
YES  
Defect Replace  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[H03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Current detection circuit error]  
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 90 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[H04]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation]  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO  
NO  
Are CN609 connection  
Correct connector.  
and case thermostat normal?  
Case thermostat error Replace  
YES  
Is cooling/heating operation  
available when short-circuiting  
case thermostat?  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Repair defectives position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there no gas leak?  
Is it not refrigerant shortage?  
YES  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
Open valve fully.  
Correct defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
Check crushed or broken pipe.  
Defect Correct and Replace  
[L10]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type]: Only when service P.C. board is used  
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
Cut jumper line according  
to the explanation sheet packaged  
with the service P.C. board.  
– 91 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[L29]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Communication error between MCU, Heat sing temp. sensor (TH) error,  
EEPROM error, Unset model type, Heat sink overheat error, Gas leak detection,  
4-way valve inverse error  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Communication error between MCU]  
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error] Refer to [F13] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error] Refer to [F31] column.  
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type] Refer to [L10] column.  
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error] Refer to [P07] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection] Refer to [P15] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error] Refer to [P19] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
– 92 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P03]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Recharge refrigerant.  
Is there no gas leak?  
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?  
YES  
NO  
Repair defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
YES  
Correct and clear the cause.  
Is it not abnormal overload?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
Is CN603 connection normal?  
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P04]  
There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.  
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.  
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat  
operation  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation] Refer to [H04] column.  
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Vdc)] Refer to [P05] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation] Refer to [P20] column.  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
[P05]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
Is there no down or up  
of power supply voltage?  
(AC198 to 264V)  
YES  
Confirm electric construction, etc.  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 93 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P07]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
Is there no loosening of  
screws of motor drive element of  
outdoor P.C. board Q200, Q300, Q400  
and rectifier DB01, DB02, DB03?  
Did not forget to apply  
YES  
radiation grease to rear side of  
Q200, DB01, DB02 or DB03?  
NO  
Apply radiation grease to objective part.  
Retightening of screws.  
(Be sure not to forget to attach insulating sheet  
between heat sink and Q300, Q400.)  
Is not the ventilation flue  
of the heat sink blocked?  
Is not the fan blocked?  
(Short-circuit, etc.)  
NO  
Remove blocking matter.  
Correct short-circuit.  
YES  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
[P15]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO  
Is there no gas leak?  
Repair defective position.  
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?  
Recharge refrigerant.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Correct defective position.  
Replace defective part.  
Is PMV normal?  
YES  
Open valve fully.  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
YES  
Correct and replace piping.  
Is there no crushed pipe?  
NO  
Check temp. sensor.  
TD sensor CN603  
TS sensor CN600  
Error  
Correct connector.  
Sensor error Replace  
OK  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
– 94 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P19]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
Temperature sensor check  
TE sensor CN601  
Is operation of  
YES  
4-way valve normal?  
TS sensor CN600  
(Check pipe temp., etc. in  
cooling/heating operation.)  
Indoor TC sensor  
Defect Correct and repair  
NO  
Is the coil  
resistance value of 4-way valve  
between 1.3 and 1.6k?  
NO  
Replace coil of 4-way valve.  
YES  
Check operation of  
outdoor P.C. board.  
(See below.)  
Error  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect replace  
OK  
Check 4-way valve.  
Defect Replace  
Check method of outdoor P.C. board operation (Self-hold valve type)  
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for  
approx. 1 second to check exchange operation to cooling cycle/heating cycle.  
• Power is turned on for approx. 10 seconds.  
• When checking again, check operation 1 minute or more after the first check  
because exothermic of part (Coil, resistance R700) is large.  
(There is no problem when coil is not connected.)  
2) After check, turn off all the Dip switch SW804.  
Exchange to cooling cycle  
Exchange to heating cycle  
SW804 SW801 CN701  
1
SW804 SW801 CN701  
1
Push  
4
Push  
4
DC200V or more  
DC200V or more  
Note) Check by tester  
Analog tester : Good if over DC200V  
Digital tester : Good if Max. value is over DC200V though the varied  
value may be displayed.  
– 95 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P20]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
NO  
Is valve fully opened?  
YES  
Open valve fully.  
Reset the power supply  
and then perform test run  
matching to the season.  
Cooling season  
Cooling operation  
Heating season  
Heating operation  
Is there no problem  
on outdoor TL sensor?  
(Measurement of resistance value)  
NO  
YES  
Replace sensor.  
NO  
Is there no crack or  
loosening of outdoor fan?  
YES  
Check outdoor fan.  
Defect Replace, retightening  
NO  
Does not the outdoor fan  
perform abnormal operation?  
YES  
Check the same items as  
[P22] error.  
Is there no element  
which interfere heat exchange  
of outdoor unit?  
YES  
• Clogging of heat exchanger  
• Short circuit  
NO  
Eliminate interfering element.  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defective position.  
NO  
NO  
Does indoor fan  
normally operate?  
Are indoor fan motor  
and connector normal?  
YES  
YES  
Repair defective position.  
Are resistance values  
of indoor TC and TCJ  
sensors normal?  
NO  
Replace  
sensor.  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Is there no element which  
interfere heat exchange of indoor unit?  
• Clogging of filter  
YES  
• Clogging of heat exchanger  
• Short circuit  
Eliminate interfering element.  
NO  
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,  
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.  
Defect Correct defective position.  
– 96 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check  
code  
Outdoor  
LED display  
Check and troubleshooting  
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)  
[P22]  
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Fan system error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
¡
NO  
Is there no problem on power supply voltage?  
(198 to 264V)  
Check wiring construction.  
Ask repair of power supply.  
YES  
Does the fan rotate without trouble when rotating  
shaft of fan motor with hands during power-OFF?  
Is there no problem on coil resistance of fan motor?  
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω  
YES  
NO  
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Replace fan motor.  
Defect Replace  
Single operation check for outdoor fan  
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for  
approx. 1 second to check single operation of outdoor fan. Use this method to  
check which fan, upper or lower fan, has a trouble.  
• When pushing SW801 for 1 second  
again or 2 minutes passed, the fan stops.  
Outdoor fan single operation  
2) After check, turn off all Dip switch  
SW804.  
SW804  
SW801  
Push  
[P26]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
¥
¡
Is there no problem on connection  
of compressor lead or reactor?  
(Check referring to Wiring diagram.)  
NO  
Correct wiring.  
YES  
NO  
The same error does not occur in  
operation without compressor lead.  
Replace outdoor P.C. board.  
YES  
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)  
Defect Replace  
[P29]  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Position detection circuit error]  
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
No code  
<Display 1> <Display 2>  
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.  
Although the display of outdoor LED outputs, the unit automatically restarts  
and error is not determined.  
LED display also may output due to negative phase of compressor or wire  
coming-off.  
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
– 97 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Temperature sensor  
Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table  
TD,TL sensors  
Representative value  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors  
Representative value  
Resistance value (kW)  
Resistance value (kW)  
Temperature  
Temperature  
(°C)  
(°C)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
32.33  
19.63  
12.23  
9.75  
33.80  
20.35  
12.59  
10.00  
7.990  
5.192  
3.451  
2.343  
1.623  
1.146  
0.8237  
0.6023  
35.30  
21.09  
12.95  
10.25  
8.218  
5.375  
3.594  
2.454  
1.709  
1.213  
0.8761  
0.6434  
0
10  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
150.5  
92.76  
58.61  
47.01  
37.93  
25.12  
17.00  
11.74  
8.269  
5.925  
4.321  
3.205  
161.3  
99.05  
62.36  
49.93  
40.22  
26.55  
17.92  
12.34  
8.668  
6.195  
4.507  
3.336  
172.7  
105.6  
66.26  
52.97  
42.59  
28.03  
18.86  
12.95  
9.074  
6.470  
4.696  
3.468  
7.764  
5.013  
3.312  
2.236  
1.540  
1.082  
0.7740  
0.5634  
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100  
Temperature (˚C)  
TD,TL sensors  
200  
150  
100  
50  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90 100  
Temperature (˚C)  
As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the resistance  
value cannot be measured.  
– 98 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD  
10-1. Indoort Unit  
<Note: when replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing>  
The nonvolatile memory (hereafter called EEPROM, IC503) on the indoor unit P.C. board before replacement  
includes the model specific type information and capacity codes as the factory-set value and the important  
setting data which have been automatically or manually set when the indoor unit is installed, such as system/  
indoor/group addresses, high ceiling select setting, etc.  
When replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, follow the procedures below.  
After replacement completes, confirm whether the settings are correct by checking the indoor unit No., Group  
header unit/follower unit settings and perform the cooling cycle confirmation through the trial operation.  
<Replacement procedures>  
CASE 1  
Before replacement, the indoor unit can be turned on and the setting data can be read out by  
wired remote control operation.  
EEPROM data read out [1]  
ò
Replacement of P.C. board for Indoor unit servicing and power on [2]  
ò
Writing the read out EEPROM data [3]  
ò
Power reset  
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)  
CASE 2  
The EEPROM before replacement is defective and the setting data cannot be read out.  
EEPROM data read out [2]  
ò
Writing the setting data to EEPROM, such as high ceiling installation setting and  
optional connection setting, etc., based on the customer information. [3]  
ò
Power reset  
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)  
– 99 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[1] Setting data read out from EEPROM  
The setting data modified on the site, other than factory-set value, stored in the EEPROM shall be read out.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
Step 1 Push  
,
and  
button on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.  
When the group operation control is performed, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.  
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation  
and the swing operation also starts if it has the louvers.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Step 2 Every time when the  
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. under the group control is displayed in  
order. Specify the indoor unit No. to be replaced.  
1. Change the CODE No. (DN) to 10-01 by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
(this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)  
At this time, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.  
2. Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing buttons for the temperature setting.  
Similarly, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.  
/
3. Repeat the step 2-2 to set the other settings in the same way and write down the setting data as shown  
in the table 1 (example).  
The COCE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) may skip.  
TEST  
Step 3 After writing down all setting data, push  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)  
CODE No. required at least  
1. The CODE No. for the Indoor unit type and Indoor unit capacity are  
DN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Contents  
Type  
required to set the rotation number setting of the fan.  
2. If the system/indoor/group addresses are different from those before  
replacement, the auto-address setting mode starts and the manual  
resetting may be required again.  
Indoor unit capacity  
System address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
(when the multiple units group operation including twin system.)  
[2] P.C. Board for indoor unit servicing replacement procedures  
Step 1 Replace the P.C. board to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.  
At this time, perform the same setting of the jumper wire (J01) setting (cut), switch SW501, (short-circuit)  
connector CN34 as the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.  
Step 2 According to the system configuration, turn on the indoor unit following to the either methods shown below.  
a) Single operation (Indoor unit is used as standalone.)  
Turn on the indoor unit.  
1. After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].  
(System address = 1, Indoor unit address = 1, Group address = 0 (standalone) are automatically set.)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
2. Push  
,
and  
buttons simultaneously for more than 4 seconds to interrupt the auto-address  
setting mode, and proceed to [3]. (The unit No. “  
” is displayed.)  
b) Group operation (including twin system)  
Turn on the indoor unit(s) with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, accord-  
ing to either methods 1 or 2 shown below.  
1. Turn on only the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced. (Be sure to confirm the remote controller is  
surely connected. If not, the operation [3] cannot be performed.)  
Perform either methods 1 or 2 described in item a) above.  
2. Turn on the multiple indoor units including the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced.  
Twin 1 system only  
• All group connections  
After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].  
* The header unit of the group may be changed by performing the auto-address setting.  
Also, the system address/Indoor unit address of the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced may be  
assigned to the addresses (not used) other than those of the indoor units without its P.C. board replaced.  
It is recommended to keep the information in advance, which cooling system the indoor unit belongs to  
or whether the indoor unit works as the header unit or the follower unit in the group control operation.  
– 100 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[3] Writing the setting data to EEPROM  
The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
Step 1 Push  
,
and  
buttons on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.  
* In the group control operation, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.  
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation  
and the swing operation starts if it has the louvers.  
(The unit No. “  
” is displayed if the auto-address setting mode is interrupted in [2] step 2 a))  
UNIT LOUVER  
Step 2 Every time when  
button is pushed, the indoor unit Nos. in the group control operation are dis-  
played in order.  
(The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.)  
Specify the indoor unit No. with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.  
(You cannot perform this operation if “  
” is displayed.)  
Step 3 Select the CODE No. (DN) can be selected by pushing the  
/
button for the temperature setting.  
• Set the indoor unit type and capacity.  
The factory-set values shall be written to the EEPROM by changing  
the type and capacity.  
<Fig. 1 RBC-AMT32E>  
1. Set the CODE No. (DN) to “10 ”. (without change)  
2. Select the type by pushing  
/
buttons for the timer setting.  
(For example, 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type is set to “0001”.  
Refer to table 2)  
SET  
3. Push  
button.  
(The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.)  
4. Change the CODE No. (DN) to “11 ” by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
5. Select the capacity by pushing  
/
buttons for the timer setting.  
(For example, 80 Type is set to “0012”. Refer to table 2)  
SET  
6. Push  
button.  
(The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)  
3 6 5 1 4 2  
Setting 4-way air discharge cassette Indoor Unit model only  
buttons, set “CE ” to the CODE No. (DN).  
buttons, set the data. (0001)  
7. Using the set temperature  
/
8. Using the timer time  
/
SET  
9. Push  
button. (The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)  
If the plug for short-circuit is attached on the P.C. board  
before replacement, attach it on the P.C. board replaced.  
Connector (CN504)  
for drain pump  
CAUTION  
Be sure to set the jumper wire since the motor  
protection level setting selection is performed on it.  
CN34  
* Set J02 as follows depending on the capacity class.  
SW501  
(Red)  
Jumper wire (J02)  
J02  
J01  
SM56, 80 type  
None  
SM110, 140 type  
Required (factory setting)  
TEST  
10. Push the  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)  
Step 4 Write the on-site setting data to the EEPROM, such as address setting, etc. Perform the steps 1 and 2  
above again.  
Step 5 Change the CODE No. (DN) to “01 ” by pushing  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
(this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)  
– 101 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6 Check the setting data displayed at this time with the setting data put down in [1].  
1. If the setting data is different, modify the setting data by pushing  
the data put down in [1].  
/
buttons for the timer setting to  
The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.  
2. If the data is the same, proceed to next step.  
Step 7 Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing  
As described above, check the setting data and modify to the data put down in [1].  
Step 8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7.  
Step 9 After the setting completes, push  
/
buttons for the temperature setting.  
TEST  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote control operation is available again.)  
* The COCE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) is not limited to be serial No.  
SET  
Even after modifying the data wrongly and pushing  
button, it is possible to return to the data before  
CL  
modification by pushing  
button if the CODE No. (DN) is not changed.  
<Fig. 2 EEPROM layout diagram>  
The EEPROM (IC503) is attached to the IC socket. When detaching the EEPROM, use a tweezers, etc.  
Be sure to attach the EEPROM by fitting its direction as shown in the figure.  
Do not bend the IC lead when replacing.  
Cut out  
EEPROM  
EEPROM  
IC503  
Cut out  
IC socket  
<Fig. 2>  
– 102 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 1. Setting data (CODE No. table (example))  
Setting data  
DN  
01  
02  
03  
Item  
Filter sign lighting time  
Factory-set value  
Depending on Type  
Filter pollution leve  
l 0000: standard  
Central control address  
0099: Not determined  
0002: +2°C  
(flooring installation type: 0)  
06  
Heating suction temperature shift  
OF  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
19  
Cooling only  
0000: Heat pump  
Type  
Depending on model type  
Depending on capacity type  
0099: Not determined  
0099: Not determined  
0099: Not determined  
Depending on Type.  
Indoor unit capacity  
System address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
Flap type (wind direction adjustment)  
Temperature range of cooling/heating  
automatic SW control point  
1E  
0003: 3 deg (Ts 1.5)  
28  
2A  
2b  
31  
32  
40  
5d  
60  
Power failure automatic recovery  
Option/Abnormal input (CN70) SW  
0000: None  
0002: Humidifier  
Thermo output SW (T10  
)
0000: Thermo ON  
0000: Not available  
0000: Body sensor  
0003: Humidifier ON + Pump OFF  
0000: Standard  
ƒ
Ventilation fan (standalone)  
Sensor SW  
Humidifier control (+ drain pump control)  
High ceiling SW  
Timer setting (wired remote controller)  
0000: Available  
Demand setting  
(outdoor unit current demand)  
C2  
0075: 75 %  
d0  
d3  
d1  
F0  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
Remote controller operation save function  
Rotation number of the self-clean operation  
Frost protection function  
0001: Enable  
0001: 210ypm(at self-clean operation)  
0000: None  
Swing mode  
0001: Standard  
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 1)  
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 2)  
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 3)  
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 4)  
0000: Not fixed  
0000: Not fixed  
0000: Not fixed  
0000: Not fixed  
Table 2.Type: CODE No. 10  
Table 3. Indoor unit capacity:  
CODE No. 11  
Setting data  
Type  
Type name abb.  
Setting data  
0000  
0009  
Type  
Disable  
56  
0001*1 * 2  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type RAV-SM∗∗∗UT-E  
1 EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing  
2  
0012  
80  
CAUTION  
0015  
110  
0017  
140  
<Model Name: RAV-SM∗∗∗UT-E>  
For the above models, set the CODE No. to “ CE ” and the setting  
data 0000 (initial) to “0001”.  
EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board  
for indoor unit servicing.  
– 103 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2. Outdoor Unit  
1. Setting the jumper wires and DIP switches  
Part name  
Function  
Setting  
J800 to J803  
Model switching  
Cut these jumper wires according to the following table.  
Jumper wire  
DIP switch  
Set these jumper wires to the settings of the P.C. board before  
replacement.  
J804 to J810  
Settings  
SW802  
SW803  
SW804  
Settings  
Set SW802 to the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.  
Set SW803 to all OFF.  
LED indication switching  
Special operations for service Set SW804 to all OFF.  
Model switching (J800 to J803)  
Since this service P.C. board is available for several models, cut the jumper wires according to the following table.  
If they are not cut correctly, an error code “L10” or “L29” appears on the remote controller and the operation of the air  
conditioner is disabled.  
Model name  
Factory setting (default)  
RAV-SP1104AT-E  
RAV-SP1404AT-E  
J 800 J 801 J 802 J 803  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
¡ ×  
: Characters that indicate the following:  
No character ...... Standard models  
: Connected,  
: Cut  
¡
×
Z......................... For salt-affected areas  
ZG ...................... For heavily salt-affected areas  
J800 to J803  
2. Installing the P.C. board  
1) Apply thermal grease to the back (heat sink contacting side) of devices Q200, Q650, DB01, and DB02.  
( Q300 and Q400 are not necessary to be applied thermal grease.)  
2) Reuse the insulating sheet. When a small amount of thermal grease is applied to the back of the insulating  
sheet, it adheres temporarily to the heat sink, which makes it easy to attach the insulating sheet.  
3) Insert the P.C. board, align the holes of the insulating sheets, semiconductor devices, and heat sinks, and  
then secure them with screws.  
4) Connect the lead wires according to the wiring diagram sticked on the backside of the pannel .  
Reuse the insulating sheet.  
Apply thermal grease to  
Applying thermal grease to the back  
the back (heat sink contacting side) of  
of the insulating sheet makes it easy  
Q200, Q650, DB01, and DB02.  
to attach the insulating sheet.  
– 104 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS  
11-1. Indoor Unit  
11-1-1. Test Run Setup on Remote Controller  
<Wired remote controller>  
TEST  
1. When pushing  
button on the remote controller for 4 seconds or more, “TEST” is displayed on LC display.  
ON / OFF  
Then push  
button.  
• “TEST” is displayed on LC display during operation of Test Run.  
• During Test Run, temperature cannot be adjusted but air volume can be selected.  
• In heating and cooling operation, a command to fix the Test Run frequency is output.  
• Detection of error is performed as usual. However, do not use this function except case of Test Run be-  
cause it applies load on the unit.  
2. Use either heating or cooling operation mode for [TEST].  
NOTE : The outdoor unit does not operate after power has been turned on or for approx. 3 minutes after  
operation has stopped.  
TEST  
3. After a Test Run has finished, push  
button again and check that [TEST] on LC display has gone off.  
(To prevent a continuous test run operation, 60-minutes timer release function is provided to this remote  
controller.)  
<Wireless remote controller>  
(4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type only)  
1
Turn off power of the unit.  
Remove the adjuster attached with sensors from the ceiling panel. For removing, refer to the Installation  
manual attached to the ceiling panel.  
(Be careful to handle the adjuster because cables are connected to the sensor.)  
Remove the sensor cover from the adjuster. (1 screw)  
2
3
Change ON of Bit [1:TEST] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003] to OFF.  
Mount the sensor cover and mount the adjuster with sensor to the ceiling panel.  
Turn on power of the unit.  
ON / OFF  
Push  
mode using  
button on the wireless remote controller and select [COOL] or [HEAT] operation  
MODE  
button.  
(All the display lamps of sensors on the wireless remote controller flash during Test Run.)  
• Do not perform Test Run operation in other modes than [HEAT] / [COOL] mode.  
• Detection of error is performed as usual.  
ON / OFF  
4
5
After Test Run operation, push  
Turn off power of the unit.  
button to stop the operation.  
Return Bit [1] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003]  
DIP switch S003  
Bit 1: OFF ON  
to the original position. (ON OFF)  
Mount the adjuster with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
ON  
Sensor board  
Sensor cover  
Adjust corner cap  
with sensor  
– 105 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Except 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type and Under Ceiling Type)  
1
Remove a screw which fixes the serial olate of the receiver part on the wireless remote  
controller.  
Remove the nameplate of the reciver section by inserting a minus screwdriver, etc. into the notch at the  
bottom of the plate, and set the Dip switch to [TEST RUN ON].  
2
Execute a test operation with  
button on the wireless remote controller.  
,
and LED flash during test operation.  
• Under status of [TEST RUN ON], the temperature adjustment from the wireless remote controller is  
invalid.  
Do not use this method in the operation other than test operation because the equipment is damaged.  
3
4
Use either [COOL] or [HEAT] operation mode for test operation.  
• The outdoor unit does not operate approx. 3 minutes  
after power-ON and operation stop.  
Receiver unit  
Spacer  
After the test operation finished, stop the air  
conditioner from the wireless remote controller,  
and return Dip switch of the sensor section as before.  
M4 × 25 screw  
(2 pieces)  
(A 60 minutes timer clearing function is attached to the sensor  
section in order to prevent a continuous test operation.)  
Nameplate  
Notch  
Small screw  
(Under Ceiling Type only)  
1
Turn off power of the air conditioner.  
Remove the adjust corner cap attached with sensor section from the ceiling panel. For removing method,  
follow to the installation manual attached to the ceiling panel. (Be careful to handle the sensor section  
because cables are connected to the sensor section.)  
Remove the sensor cover from the adjust corner cap. (1 screw)  
2
3
Change Bit [1:TEST] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from OFF to ON.  
Mount the sensor cover and attach the adjust corner cap with with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
Turn on power of the air conditioner.  
Push  
button of the wireless remote controller and select an operation mode [COOL] or  
MODE  
[HEAT] with  
button. (All the display lamps of the wireless remote controller sensor  
section flash during the tst operation.)  
• Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Error is detected as usual.  
4
5
When the test operation has finished, push button to stop the operation.  
Turn off power of the air conditioner.  
Change Bit [1] of the switch [S003] on the sensor  
P.C. board from ON to OFF. Attach the adjust  
corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
4
3
1 2  
ON  
– 106 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<In case of wireless remote controller>  
Procedure  
Description  
Turn on power of the air conditioner.  
The operation is not accepted for 5 minutes when power has been turned on at first time after installation,  
and 1 minute when power has been turned on at the next time and after. After the specified time has  
passed, perform a test operation.  
1
Push [Start/Stop] button and change the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] with [Mode] button.  
2
3
Then change the fan speed to [High] using [Fan] button.  
Test cooling operation  
Test heating operation  
Set temperature to [18°C] using [Temperature set]  
button.  
Set temperature to [30°C] using [Temperature set]  
button.  
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately  
push [Temperature set] button to set to [19°C] push [Temperature set] button to set to [29°C].  
4
5
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately  
push [Temperature set] button to set to [18°C]. push [Temperature set] button to set to [30°C].  
Then repeat the procedure  
.
4 5 4 5  
After approx. 10 seconds, all the display lamps on the sensor part of wireless remote controller,  
6
7
[Operation] (Green), [Timer] (Green), and [Ready] (Yellow) flash and the air conditioner starts operation.  
If the lamps do not flash, repeat the procedure  
and after.  
2
After the test operation, push [Start/Stop] button to stop the operation.  
<Outline of test operation from the wireless remote controller>  
Test cooling operation:  
Start 18°C 19°C 18°C 19°C 18°C 19°C 18°C (Test operation) Stop  
Test heating operation:  
Start 30°C 29°C 30°C 29°C 30°C 29°C 30°C (Test operation) Stop  
Be sure to set the  
air speed to [High]  
2
3, 4, 5, 6  
2, 7  
– 107 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1-2. Forced Defrost Setup of Remote Controller (For wired remote controller only)  
(Preparation in advance)  
TEST  
SET  
CL  
1
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.  
(Push buttons while the air conditioner stops.)  
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.  
UNIT  
2
Every pushing  
other.  
button, the indoor unit No. in the group control is displayed one after the  
Select a main indoor unit (outdoor unit is connected) which is to be defrosted. In this time, fan and louver of  
the selected indoor unit operate.  
TEMP.  
3
4
5
6
Using the set temperature  
buttons, specify the item code (DN) 8C.  
TIME  
Using the timer time  
buttons, set time to data 0001. (0000 at shipment)  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK if indication lights)  
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to the normal stop status.  
(Practical operation)  
ON / OFF  
• Push ON/OFF  
Key.  
• Select the HEAT mode.  
• After while, the forced defrost signal is sent to the outdoor unit and then the outdoor unit starts defrost operation.  
(The forced defrost operation is performed for Max. 12 minutes.)  
• After defrost operation finished, the operation returns to the heating operation.  
To execute the defrost operation again, start procedure from above item  
(If the forced defrost operation was executed once, setting of the above forced defrost operation is cleared.)  
1
.
11-1-3. LED Display on P.C. Board  
1. D501 (Red)  
• It goes on (Goes on by operation of the main microcomputer) at the same time when the power supply is  
turned on.  
• It flashes with 1-second interval (every 0.5 second):When there is no EEPROM or writing-in operation fails.  
• It flashes with 10-seconds interval (every 5 second): During DISP mode  
• It flashes with 2-seconds interval (every 1 second): While setting of function select (EEPROM)  
2. D403 (Red)  
• It goes on when power supply of the remote controller is turned on. (Lights on hardware)  
3. D503 (Yellow): Main bus communication  
• It goes on for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the central controller.  
4. D504 (Green): Sub bus communication  
• It flashes for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the remote controller. (Group master unit)  
• It flashes with 0.2-second interval (for 0.1 second) for 5 second in the latter half of communication between  
master and follower in the Gr indoor unit.  
5. D14 (Orange)  
• It flashes while receiving the serial signal from the outdoor unit. (Hardware)  
6. D15 (Green)  
• It flashes while sending the serial signal to the outdoor unit. (Hardware)  
– 108 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1-4. Function Selection Setup  
<Procedure> Perform setting while the air conditioner stops.  
TEST  
SET  
CL  
1
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.  
In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit operate.  
ò
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Every pushing  
button (button at left side), the indoor unit No. in the group control is  
displayed one after the other. In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only operate.  
ò
TEMP.  
3
4
5
Using the set temperature  
buttons, specify the item code (DN).  
ò
TIME  
Using the timer time  
buttons, select the set data.  
ò
SET  
Push  
button. (OK if indication lights)  
To change the selected indoor unit, proceed to Procedure  
2
.
To change item to be set up, proceed to Procedure  
3
.
ò
TEST  
6
Pushing  
button returns the status to the normal stop status.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
3
6
4
5
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
1
2
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3 4 5 6 END  
– 109 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function selection item No. (DN) list  
DN  
Item  
Contents  
At shipment from factory  
0000: None  
0001: 150H  
01  
Filter sign lighting time  
0002: 2500H  
0004: 10000H  
0003: 5000H  
0005: Clogging sensor used  
According to type  
0000: Standard  
0001: Heavy stain (Half of standard time)  
02  
03  
Filter stain level  
0000: Standard  
0001: No.1 unit  
0099: Undecided  
to  
0064: No.64 unit  
Central control address  
0099: Undecided  
0000: No shift  
0002: +2°C  
0001: +1°C  
0010: +10°C  
(Up to +6 is recommended.)  
0002: +2°C  
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)  
06  
Heating suction temp. shift  
to  
0000: Heat pump  
0001: Cooling only (No display for [AUTO] [HEAT] )  
0F Cooling-only  
0000: Heat pump  
0000: (1-way air discharge cassette)  
0001: (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037  
10  
Type  
According to model type  
11  
12  
13  
Indoor unit capacity  
Line address  
0000: Undecided  
0001: No.1 unit  
0001: No.1 unit  
0000: Individual  
0001 to 0034  
According to capacity type  
0099: Undecided  
to  
to  
0030: No.30 unit  
0064: No.64 unit  
0001: Master unit in group  
Indoor unit address  
0099: Undecided  
14  
19  
Group address  
0099: Undecided  
0002: Follower unit in group  
0000: No louver model  
(0002:1-way)  
0004: 4-way  
0001: Swing only  
(0003:2-way)  
Louver type  
(Adjustment of air direction)  
According to model type  
In automatic cooling/heating, temp.  
1E width of cool heat, heat cool  
0000: 0 deg  
to  
0010: 10 deg  
0003: 3 deg  
(Ts 1.5)  
(Cool/heat are reversed with (Data value) /  
2 against the set temperature)  
mode selection control point  
28  
Automatic reset of power failure  
0000: None  
0001: Provided  
0000: None  
0000: Filter input  
0002: Humidifier input  
0001: Alarm input  
2A Selection of option / error input (CN70)  
0002: Humidifier  
(Air cleaner, etc.)  
Selection of thermostat output  
2b  
0000: Indoor thermostat ON  
0001: ON receiving output of outdoor compressor  
0000: Thermostat ON  
(T10  
)
ƒ
0000: Normal (JEMA)  
0002: Fire alarm input  
0001: Card input  
(Forgotten to be off)  
0000: Normal  
(HA terminal)  
2E Selection of HA (T10) terminal  
AUTO grille  
(This function is not provided.)  
0000: Impossible  
0001: Possible  
30  
0000: Impossible  
31  
32  
Fan (Single operation)  
Sensor selection  
0000: Impossible  
0000: Body TA sensor  
0000: No control  
0001: Possible  
0000: Impossible  
0001: Remote controller sensor  
0000: Body sensor  
Humidifier control  
(+Drain pump control)  
(This function is not provided.)  
0001: Humidifier + Vaporizing type (Pump ON)  
0002: Humidifier + Supersonic type  
(Pump ON when specified time elapsed)  
0003: Humidifier + Natural drain type (Pump OFF)  
0003: Humidifier ON  
Pump OFF  
40  
0000: Standard filter  
High ceiling selection  
(Air volume selection)  
0001: Super long life  
0003: High performance (65%), High performance (90%),  
(0006:Deodorant, Ammonia deodorization)  
5d  
60  
0000: Standard  
0000: Operable  
Timer setting (Wired remote controller) 0000: Operable  
0001: Operation prohibited  
– 110 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DN  
Item  
Contents  
0000: 0.5 h to 0.012: 0 h  
At shipment from factory  
0000: None  
Set when compressor-ON time is 10 to 60 minutes.  
42  
Self-clean operation time  
0002: 1 hour  
When ON-time is 60 minutes or more,  
the double of this operation time setting is set.  
Selection of louver horizontal discharge  
position  
0000: Smudging-less setting  
0002: Cold draft preventive setting  
0000: Smudging-  
less setting  
45  
C2 Current demand X% to outdoor unit  
0050: 50%  
to  
0100: 100%  
0075: 75%  
0000: No  
• Clean operation is performed in case of stop by HA input.  
• HA operation output OFF during clean operation in case of  
stop by remote controller  
0000: None  
CC Setting of self-clean operation forced stop  
0001: Yes  
• Clean operation is not performed in case of stop by HA input.  
• HA operation output ON during clean operation in case of stop  
by remote controller  
The air conditioner stops (including fire alarm such as remote  
monitor system) while setup of [ON/OFF] operation prohibited  
(Central 1, 2) is performed from the central controller side.  
Clean operation stop function when  
CD  
0000: Valid  
[ON/OFF] operation is prohibited.  
0000: Valid (Clean operation)  
0001: Invalid (No clean operation)  
D0 Existence of remote controller save function 0000: Invalid (Impossible)  
D1 Existence of 8°C heating operation function 0000: Invalid (Impossible)  
0001: Valid (Possible)  
0001: Valid (Possible)  
0001: Valid (Possible)  
0001: Invalid (Impossible)  
0000: Invalid (Self clean operation is not carried out.)  
0001: Valid (Self clean operation is practiced with 210 rpm.)  
0001: Valid  
D3 Revolution frequency of self clean operation  
(210 rpm / operation)  
Display / No display of  
[Dry operation] during self clean operation  
D4  
0000: Display  
0001: No display  
0000: Display  
0000: No synchronization  
0002: Dual  
0001: 4-way synchronization  
0003: Cycle  
0001: 4-way  
F0 Louver swing mode  
synchronization  
0000: Release (Free)  
F1 Louver No.1 fixed position  
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to  
Downward discharge position  
0000: Release  
0000: Release  
0000: Release  
0000: Release  
0000: Release (Free)  
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to  
Downward discharge position  
F2 Louver No.2 fixed position  
F3 Louver No.3 fixed position  
F4 Louver No.4 fixed position  
0000: Release (Free)  
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to  
Downward discharge position  
0000: Release (Free)  
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to  
Downward discharge position  
The swing mode selection (DN code No. [F0]), louver fix (DN code No. [F1] to [F4]) and restriction ratio setting for  
save operation (DN code No. [C2]) can be set/changed from the normal DN setup (Detail DN setup).  
– 111 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1-5. Wiring and Setting of Remote Controller Control  
2-remote controller control  
<Wired remote controller>  
(Controlled by 2 remote controllers)  
This control is to operate 1 or multiple indoor units  
are operated by two remote controllers.  
How to set wired remote controller  
as sub remote controller  
Change DIP switch inside of the rear side of the  
remote controller switch from remote controller master  
to sub. (In case of RBC-AMT32E)  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
• When connected 2 remote controllers  
operate an indoor unit  
Remote controller (Inside of the rear side)  
Remote controller  
switch (Master)  
Remote controller  
switch (Sub)  
Sold  
Sold  
separately  
separately  
1 2  
A B  
A B  
Sub remote  
controller  
Master remote  
controller  
1
2
Remote controller  
cables (Procured locally)  
DIP switch  
Terminal block for  
remote controller cables  
1
2
A B  
Indoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
<Wireless remote controller>  
Outdoor unit  
How to set wireless remote controller to sub  
remote controller  
Change OFF of Bit [3: Remote controller Sub/Master]  
of switch S003 to ON.  
• When connected 2 remote controllers  
operate the twin  
Remote controller  
switch (Master)  
Remote controller  
switch (Sub)  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wire  
(Procured locally)  
Sold  
Sold  
separately  
separately  
DIP switch S003  
Bit 1: OFF ON  
A B  
A B  
ON  
Terminal block for  
remote controller cables  
Sensor board  
Sensor cover  
A B  
A B  
Indoor unit 1  
1 2 3  
Indoor unit 2  
1 2 3  
Adjust corner cap  
with sensor  
1 2 3  
Inter-unit wiring  
between indoor units  
(Procured locally)  
Outdoor unit  
(Setup method)  
[Operation]  
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by  
2 remote controllers.  
1. The operation contents can be changed by Last-  
push-priority.  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
2. Use a timer on either Master remote controller or  
Sub remote controller.  
– 112 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1-6. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch  
n Calling of sensor temperature display  
<Contents>  
Each data of the remote controller, indoor unit and outdoor unit can be understood by calling the service monitor  
mode from the remote controller.  
<Procedure>  
CL  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds to  
call the service monitor mode.  
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit No. is  
displayed at first and then the temperature of item code 00 is  
displayed.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
ò
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
TEMP.  
2
Push temperature set  
the item code of data to be monitored.  
buttons and then change  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
The item code list is shown below.  
2 4 1  
<Operation procedure>  
3
1 2 3 4  
Returned to usual display  
Item code  
Data name  
Unit  
Item code  
Data name  
Unit  
01  
Room temperature  
°C  
60  
61  
62  
63  
65  
6A  
6D  
70  
72  
73  
F1  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TE)  
Outside temperature (TO)  
°C  
°C  
(Remote controller)  
02  
03  
Indoor suction temperature (TA)  
°C  
°C  
Compressor discharge temperature (TD)  
Compressor suction temperature (TS)  
Heat sing temperature (THS)  
°C  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TCJ)  
°C  
°C  
04  
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)  
temperature (TC)  
°C  
Operation current  
A
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TL)  
Compressor operation frequency  
°C  
07  
F2  
F3  
F8  
Indoor fan revolution frequency  
Indoor fan calculated operation time  
Filter sign time  
rpm  
×100h  
×1h  
rps  
rpm  
rpm  
×100h  
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Lower)  
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Upper)  
Compressor calculated operation time  
Indoor discharge temperature*1  
°C  
ò
UNIT  
3
4
Push  
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.  
Each data of the indoor unit and its outdoor units can be monitored.  
ò
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to the usual display.  
1 The indoor discharge temperature of item code [F8] is the estimated value from TC or TCJ sensor.  
Use this value to check discharge temperature at test run.  
(A discharge temperature sensor is not provided to this model.)  
• The data value of each item is not the real time, but value delayed by a few seconds to ten-odd  
seconds.  
• If the combined outdoor unit is one before 2 or 3 series, the outdoor unit data [6D], [70], [72] and [73]  
are not displayed.  
– 113 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Calling of error history  
<Contents>  
The error contents in the past can be called.  
<Procedure>  
SET  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for  
4 seconds or more to call the service check mode.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Service Check goes on, the item code 01 is displayed, and  
then the content of the latest alarm is displayed. The number  
and error contents of the indoor unit in which an error oc-  
curred are displayed.  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
In order to monitor another error history, push the set  
temperature  
/
buttons to change the error  
history No. (Item code).  
Item code 01 (Latest) Item code 04 (Old)  
NOTE : 4 error histories are stored in memory.  
2 3 1  
TEST  
3
Pushing  
button returns the display to usual display.  
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3  
REQUIREMENT  
CL  
Do not push  
indoor unit are deleted.  
button, otherwise all the error histories of the  
Returned to usual display  
(Group control operation)  
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.  
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to  
setting on the remote controller.  
<System example>  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Master  
2-1  
1-1  
3-1  
4-1  
7-1  
Max. 8 units  
Remote controller  
1. Display range on remote controller  
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the  
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.  
2. Address setup  
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic  
address.  
If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address setting), the  
system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.  
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.  
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.  
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the  
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.  
– 114 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Indoor unit power-ON sequence  
Power ON  
• The unit without power feed waits entirely  
Waiting status is released by system start  
• Reboot when power is fed on the way  
<By feed unit>  
<Automatic  
address judgment>  
Not normal  
NO  
3 minutes elapse  
Gr construction check  
YES  
Normal  
Gr normal  
1) There is no duplicated indoor unit address.  
2) There is no invalid indoor unit address.  
3) Individual unit and master/follower units  
are not intermingled.  
4) Only a unit for individual.  
5) A master indoor unit and 1 or more  
follower indoor units for Gr.  
System start  
Automatic address starts.  
(Approx. 1 minute up to finish)  
<Initial communication>  
Outdoor model distinction (10 seconds) (Indoor unit)  
Twin Master/follower distinction (Indoor unit)  
Gr construction, louver information (Remote controller)  
<Cautions at test run>  
• Power supply/Indoor/Outdoor serial and Gr wiring: OK  
• Powers of all indoor units are turned on within 3 minutes.  
• Reception time for remote controller operation  
(After power supply was turned on)  
1) When address is OK : Approx. 50 seconds  
2) In AUTO address  
: Approx. 4 to 5 minutes  
Remote controller operation is available.  
(Approx. 50 seconds after power-ON)  
<Usual regular  
communication>  
Regular communication between indoor units (Every 30 seconds) (Master/Follower)  
Regular communication on the identical pipe (every 30 seconds) (Twin Master/Follower)  
(When the above status changes, immediately communicates.)  
(Repetition)  
• In a group operation, if the indoor unit which was fed power after judgment of automatic address cannot receive  
regular communication from the master unit and regular communication on identical pipe within 120 seconds after  
power was turned on, it reboots (system reset).  
The operation starts from judgment of automatic address (Gr construction check) again.  
(If the address of the master unit was determined in the previous time, the power fed to the master unit and  
reboot works, the master unit may change though the indoor unit line address is not changed.)  
– 115 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2. Setup at Local Site / Others  
Model name:TCB-PCNT30TLE2  
11-2-1. TCC-LINK Adapter (For TCC-LINK Central Control)  
1. Function  
This model is an optional P.C. board to connect the indoor unit to TCC-LINK (Central controller).  
2. Microprocessor block diagram  
Indoor unit  
Central  
controller  
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board  
CN40  
CN050  
Indoor control  
P.C. board  
CN51  
TCC-LINK  
communication circuit  
Terminal  
resistance  
CN041  
SW01  
TCC-LINK  
MCC-1440  
Terminal block  
(A, B)  
Communication units:  
Total 64 units  
Communication distance:  
2000 m  
Remote controller  
3. TCC-LINK wiring connection  
CAUTION  
1) When controlling customized setup collectively, TCC-LINK adapter (This option) is required.  
2) In case of group operation or twin/triple operation, the adapter is necessary to be connected to the main unit.  
3) Connect the central control devices to the central control system wiring.  
4) When controlling collectively customized setup only, turn on only Bit 1 of SW01 of the least line of the system  
address No. (OFF when shipped from the factory)  
* In case of customized setup, the address is necessary to be set up again from the wired remote  
controller after automatic addressing.  
Central control device  
Central control device  
Central control devices: Max. 10 units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
Refrigerant line 1  
Refrigerant line 2  
Refrigerant line 3  
1 2 3  
Refrigerant line 4  
1 2 3  
Outdoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)  
Central control system wiring  
Caution 3  
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only  
Master  
unit  
Sub  
unit  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
TCC-LINK adapter  
This product  
(
)
Caution 1  
Caution 2  
sold separately  
Remote controller  
wiring  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Group operation (Max. 8 units)  
Indoor units in all refrigerant lines: Max. 64 units  
Twin operation  
[If mixed with multi model (Link wiring), multi indoor units are included.]  
* However group sub units and twin sub units of customized setup are not included in number of the units.  
– 116 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Wiring specifications  
• Use 2-core with no polar wire.  
• Match the length of wire to wire length of the central  
control system.  
No. of wires  
Size  
Up to 1000m: twisted wire 1.25mm2  
Up to 2000m: twisted wire 2.0mm2  
2
If mixed in the system, the wire length is  
lengthened with all indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire length at side.  
To prevent noise trouble, use 2-core shield wire.  
• Connect the shield wire by closed-end connection and apply open process (insulating process) to the last  
terminal. Ground the earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side. (In case of central controlling of digital inverter  
unit setup)  
CAUTION  
1) Closed-end connection of shield wire (Connect all the connecting parts of each indoor unit)  
2) Apply open process to the last terminal (insulating process).  
Central control device  
3) Ground earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side.  
U1 U2  
Caution 2  
Caution 1  
Caution 3  
Central control system wiring  
Outdoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
: TCC-LINK adapter  
(This option)  
Master  
unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
Sub unit  
1 2 3  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
Earth terminal  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
(Group operation)  
(Twin operation)  
5. P.C. board switch (SW01) setup  
When performing collective control by customized setup only, the setup of terminator is necessary.  
• Using SW01, set up the terminator.  
• Set up the terminator to only the adapter connected to the indoor unit of least line address No.  
Central control device  
Central control device  
Central control devices: Max. 10 units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
Refrigerant line 1  
Outdoor unit  
Refrigerant line 2  
Refrigerant line 3  
1 2 3  
Refrigerant line 4  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)  
Central control system wiring  
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only  
Master  
unit  
Sub  
unit  
Sub unit  
Master unit  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
1 2 3  
A B  
Remote controller wiring  
Remote controller Remote controller  
Group operation (Max. 8 units)  
1 2 3  
U3 U4 1 2 3  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
TCC-LINK adapter  
This product  
sold separately  
(
)
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Twin operation  
Line address  
SW01 Bit 1  
SW01 Bit 2  
Remarks  
1
ON  
OFF  
2
OF  
OFF  
4
OF  
OFF  
(OFF at shipment from factory)  
(OFF at shipment from factory)  
Turn SW01 Bit 1 to ON. As status shipped from factory  
As status shipped from factory  
(Reference) Setup contents of switch  
SW01  
Terminator  
Remarks  
Bit 1  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Bit 1  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
None  
100  
75Ω  
Mixed with multi (Link wiring) at shipment from factory  
Central control by digital inverter only  
Spare  
Spare  
ON  
43Ω  
– 117 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. External view of P.C. board assembly  
Terminator (SW01)  
52  
85  
7. Address setup  
In addition to set up the central control address, it is necessary to change the indoor unit number.  
(Line/Indoor/Group address).  
For details, refer to TCC-LINK Adapter Installation Manual.  
11-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number  
When connecting the indoor unit to the central control remote controller using TCC-LINK adapter, it is neces-  
sary to set up the central control address number.  
• The central control address number is displayed as the line No. of the central control remote controller.  
1. Setup from remote controller at indoor unit side  
* If you use the network adapter P.C. board, it is effective only when No. 7 of setup switch SW01 on P.C.  
board is turned off.  
<Procedure> Perform setup while the unit stops.  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
When group control is executed, first the unit No.  
control are selected. In this time, fans of all the selected indoor units are turned on. (Fig. 1)  
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
is displayed and all the indoor units in the group  
UNIT  
(Keep  
displayed status without pushing  
button.)  
In case of individual remote controller which is not group-controlled, Line address and Indoor unit address  
are displayed.  
TEMP.  
2
3
Using temperature setup  
buttons, specify item code 03.  
TIME  
Using timer time  
buttons, select the setup data.  
The setup data is shown in the table below (Table 1).  
SET  
4
5
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
(Fig.1)  
To change the item to be set up, return to Procedure 2.  
TEST  
Push  
button.  
The status returns to usual stop status.  
(Table 1)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Setup data  
Central control address No.  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2
1
0001  
0002  
0003  
:
1
2
3
TIME  
3
1
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
:
0064  
64  
0099  
Unset (Setup at shipment from factory)  
4
5
– 118 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. How to confirm the central control address  
(New function for AMT32 remote controller)  
<Procedure> It can be confirmed even during operation or stopping.  
UNIT LOUVER  
1
2
Push  
button for 4 seconds or more.  
ò
In the frame at left side of the remote controller screen, the lighting set contents are  
displayed.  
During unset time, 0099 (At shipment from factory) is displayed.  
ò
3
After lighting display for 3 seconds, the display automatically disappears.  
If any button is pushed during display, immediately the display disappears and then the pushed button is  
displayed.  
– 119 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual swing  
(Recommended for heating operation)  
3. How to set up type of swing  
SWING/FIX  
1
Push  
of the operation.  
for 4 seconds or more during stop  
• The adjoined louvers repeat horizontal  
discharge/Downward discharge alternately  
to clear irregularity of the temperature in  
heating operation.  
flashes.  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Push  
(At the left side of the button)  
• The vertical discharge spreads hot air to the  
floor, and the horizontal discharge stirs.  
Both suppress the temperature irregularity.  
and select the unit to be selected.  
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.  
Horizontal  
discharge  
UNIT No.  
1–1  
UNIT No.  
1–2  
UNIT No.  
1–3  
Horizontal  
discharge  
UNIT No.  
No display  
UNIT No.  
1–4  
Downward  
discharge  
Downward  
discharge  
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the louver swings.  
3
Using TIMER SET  
the swing.  
/
buttons, select type of  
Horizontal  
discharge  
Horizontal  
discharge  
Downward  
discharge  
Downward  
discharge  
Swing setup code  
Cycle swing  
Swing setup code  
Louver operation  
Standard swing (At shipment)  
Dual swing  
(Recommended for cooling operation)  
• 4 louvers swing with time lag as if they  
heave.  
0001  
0002  
0003  
Cycle swing  
REQUIREMENT  
• Do not set 0000. (Louver may cause a trouble.)  
SET  
4
5
Push  
Push  
.
TEST  
to finish the setup.  
Standard swing  
Four louvers swing simultaneously with the same  
angel.  
Swing  
– 120 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F1 displayed at the item code on the remote  
controller means that the 01 louver was selected  
4. How to set louver lock (Louver fix)  
UNIT LOUVER  
1
Push  
(At the right side of the  
as shown in the figure.  
03  
button) for 4 seconds or more during stop  
of the operation.  
Refrigerant pipe  
flashes.  
Electric parts box  
UNIT LOUVER  
2
Push  
(At the left side of the button)  
04  
02  
and select the unit to be set.  
Drain pipe  
• Every pushing the button, the unit No.  
changes.  
01  
UNIT No.  
1–1  
UNIT No.  
1–2  
UNIT No.  
1–3  
NOTIFICATION  
UNIT No.  
1–4  
• Even if louver lock works, the louver temporarily  
moves in the following cases.  
1) During stop  
2) At start of heating operation  
3) During defrost operation  
4) During thermostat OFF  
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the  
louver swings.  
3
4
Push temp. set  
/
to display the  
louver No. of which air direction is to be  
fixed.  
5. How to clear louver lock  
• The selected louver swings.  
In the item 4 of the louver lock setup  
procedure, set the air direction to 0000.  
[F1]  
[F2]  
[F3]  
[F4]  
mark goes off.  
Code 0000  
The operations from 1 to 3, 5 and  
6 are same as those of the louver lock.  
Push TIMER SET  
/
and select air  
direction of the louver of which swinging  
you do not want.  
6. How to set contents of save operation  
In combination with outdoor units before 4 series,  
the displayed setup value exchanges, but the real  
operation is “75% fixed”.  
SAVE  
Code 0001  
0002  
0003  
1
2
Push  
for 4 seconds or more during  
stop of the operation.  
flashes.  
UNIT LOUVER  
Push  
(At the left side of the button)  
and select the unit to be set.  
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.  
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the  
louver swings.  
0005  
and  
0004  
If selecting above  
of dewing in cooling time.  
, there may be fear  
UNIT No.  
1–1  
UNIT No.  
1–2  
UNIT No. 1–4  
UNIT No.  
1–3  
SET  
5
6
Push  
to determine the setup contents.  
• When the setup was determined,  
mark goes on.  
To set continuously the louver lock of the  
other unit, repeat operations from 2 but  
from 3 to set the other louver lock in the  
same unit, respectively.  
3
Determine the capacity restricted value when  
pushing the save button ofTIMER SET  
• Every pushing the button, the capacity restricted  
value can be set at 1% interval in the range  
between 100% and 50%.  
/
.
TEST  
Push  
to finish the setup.  
The setting at shipment is 75%.  
Louver  
No.  
Setup value at saving  
0001 to 0005  
(Louver fixed position code)  
4
Push SET and then push TEST to finish the setup.  
– 121 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4. Outdoor Unit  
11-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control  
The “ozone destruction coefficient” of HFC refrigerant is 0 and the  
discharge regulation is set as anathermal effect gas.  
W804: All OFF (As initial status)  
SW801: Push for 1 second.  
To this model, a switch which can perform the refrigerant recovery  
(pump down) by the outdoor unit is mounted so that it is easy to react  
against the environment at reinstalling or rejection time.  
[Operation method]  
The D805 (Green LED)  
flashes.  
1) Set the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.  
2) Set all DIP switch SW804 to OFF (Initial status) and then push the  
button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second. The cooling operation  
starts. (During this time, D805 (Green LED) flashes.)  
This operation finishes by 10 minutes.  
D800  
D801  
D802  
D803  
D804  
D805  
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close valve at liquid side.  
4) After recovery of refrigerant, close valve at gas side.  
5) Push the button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second.  
The outdoor unit stops.  
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.  
11-4-2. Various setting on outdoor unit (Existing piping, Power save, Cooling-only, etc.)  
The following settings are available by DIP switch setup and jumper line setup.  
Function  
Set position  
Control contents  
Turn the switch to ON when mounting a duct to the discharge  
port of the outdoor unit. Add 3 taps to the upper limit value of the  
outdoor fan tap.  
High static  
pressure setup  
The operation is performed with  
(Max: Upper fan: 890 rpm / Lower fan: 910 rpm (WF)).  
In this case, the outdoor noise level may increase.  
SW802  
Turn the switch to ON when Ø19.1 is used for the existing pipe.  
In this case, the heating capacity may lower according to outside  
temp. and indoor temp. in heating operation.  
High static pressure setup  
Existing piping setup  
Power save setup  
Existing piping  
setup  
Turn the switch to ON when using the power save function.  
The control to lower the compressor frequency (Approx. –10%) is  
performed by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.  
Snow-proof fan control  
Power save setup  
When snow enters from clearance of the fan guard or heat  
exchanger into blast path and it is accumulated, the control to  
prevent generation of motor lock is validated.  
When outside temp. is below 0°C though the compressor stops,  
the outdoor fan operates with W5.  
Snow-proof fan  
control  
all are OFF at shipment.  
The defrost interval is cut to shorten it than the standard status.  
For contents of control and cutting method, refer to  
Section 8-2-10. Defrost control.  
Defrost time  
change  
J805, J806  
When it is needed to lower the maximum value of the  
compressor frequency, cut the jumper line.  
Max. frequency at cooling/heating is lowered.  
In this case the Max. capacity decreases.  
Max. frequency of compressor  
Max. frequency  
change  
J807  
J808  
RAV-SP1104  
RAV-SP1404  
Model  
COOL  
53.4  
HEAT  
71.4  
COOL  
64.2  
HEAT  
90.6  
Standard status  
When J807 is cut  
53.4  
64.2  
64.2  
72.0  
When using the air conditioner as a cooling-only conditioner, cut  
the jumper line.(An air conditioner can be changed to cooling-  
only conditioner by “0F” of DN code on the remote controller.)  
Cooling-only setup  
– 122 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4-3. Service Support Function (LED Display, Switch Operation)  
1. Outline  
A various setup and operation check can be performed by DIP switches at 3 positions (SW802, SW803,  
SW804) and the pushdown button switches (SW800, SW801) at 2 positions.  
Operation part  
Part No.  
SW800  
SW803  
SW801  
SW804  
SW802  
Specifications  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Operation contents  
Exchanges the displayed contents of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor  
control P.C. board.  
Pushdown button switch  
DIP switch  
Performs the specific operation to check maintenance.  
Performs various initial settings. (Refer to 11-4-2.)  
DIP switch  
Display part  
Part No.  
Specifications  
Operation contents  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Receive signal from indoor signal)  
D502  
Orange LED  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display  
(Send signal from outdoor signal)  
D503  
Green LED  
Yellow LED  
Error display  
When all SW803 are OFF, or when any of D800 to D804 goes on, LED  
displays that the outdoor controller detects an error.  
D800 to D804  
When status of SW803 is other than OFF, various indications are displayed.  
Power-ON display  
When the power of the outdoor unit is turned on, LED goes on.  
When SW801 and SW804 operate the specific operation, LED flashes.  
D805  
Green LED  
All LED are colorless when it goes off.  
SW804 Specific operation switch  
SW801 (Various operations during maintenance check operation)  
SW800  
LED display select switch  
SW803  
SW800 (Yellow LED)  
SW801 (Yellow LED)  
SW802 (Yellow LED)  
SW803 (Yellow LED)  
SW804 (Yellow LED)  
Error display / various display  
D800  
D801  
D802  
D803  
D804  
D805  
SW805 (Green LED) : Display while power is ON  
D503 (Green LED) : Serial signal (Outdoor Indoor)  
D502 (Orange LED) : Serial signal (Indoor Outdoor)  
SW802 : Selection of various initial settings  
– 123 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4-4. Others  
1. Selection of LED display (SW800, SW803 operation)  
1) Display selection list  
The displayed contents of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control P.C. board can be exchanged by  
operation of SW803.  
Switch  
Function / Contents  
Refer  
Error display (Error generating at present)  
Error generating at present is displayed.  
Refer to  
Page 125.  
SW803  
This switch goes off when an error does not generate.  
Error display (The latest error: Latest error including present)  
Refer to  
Page 125.  
After error status was cleared, the error which generated before  
can be confirmed by this setting. (Reconfirmation is available  
even if power supply was turned off once.)  
SW803  
• If an error generates at present, the same contents as those of  
error which is generating at present are displayed.  
• Only error of TO sensor is not displayed by this setting.  
(Confirm it by setting of error which is generating at present.)  
Temperature sensor display  
Refer to  
Page 126.  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
SW803  
TS  
SW803  
The detected value of temperature sensor is displayed.  
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
Current display  
Refer to  
Page 126.  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
The current value which flows in the outdoor unit is displayed.  
Compressor operation frequency display  
Refer to  
Page 126.  
The operation frequency of the compressor is displayed.  
PMV opening display  
Refer to  
Page 126.  
The opening of PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) is displayed.  
– 124 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Error display  
The error which is generating at present and the latest error (Latest error information including present)  
can be confirmed by lighting LED D800 toD804 on the outdoor control P.C. board.  
a) When all DIP switch SW803 are OFF, the status of error which is generating at present is displayed.  
b) <1> only of DIP switch SW803 is turned on, the error which generated before  
(Latest error information including present) is displayed.a)  
c) If there is an error, any of LED D800 to D804 goes on. (Display 1)  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second, the display is exchanged.  
(Display 2)  
e) When pushing SW800 again or after 2 minutes, the status returns to that of Display  
.

(Legend)  
Present error  
Latest error  
SW803  
SW803  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
: Go on,  
: Flash  
l : Go off,  
¡
¥
Display 1)  
Display 2)  
Wired remote controller  
Error code  
Error contents  
(Initial display) (SW800 operation)  
Normal  
F04  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
lllll  
¥
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error  
Outside temp. sensor (TO) error  
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error  
Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error  
Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) miswiring  
EEPROM error  
ll ll  
F06  
¥¥  
l
ll  
ll  
F06, F07  
F08  
¥¥¥  
¥ ¡  
lll l  
¥¥ ¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
ll  
F06, F12  
F13, L29  
F06, F15  
F31, L29  
H01  
ll  
l
¥ ¥¥ ¡  
l
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
Compressor break down  
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
llll  
¥
l lll  
lll  
¥
ll ll  
Compressor lock  
H02  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
Current detection circuit error  
Case thermostat operation  
Model unset  
H03  
¥¥  
H04, P04  
L10, L29  
L29  
¥ ¥ ¡  
l l l  
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡  
Communication error between MCU  
Other error (Compressor disorder, etc.)  
Discharge temp. error  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
l
Error is not determined.  
P03  
¥¥  
¡
¡
¡
lll  
l ll  
¥¥¥  
ll  
Power supply error  
P04, P05  
P07, L29  
P15, L29  
P19, L29  
P04, P20  
P22  
¥ ¥  
Heat sink overheat error  
Gas leak detection  
¥¥¥¥ ¡  
l
¥¡  
4-way valve reverse error  
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
l
¥¥  
ll  
High pressure protective operation  
Fan system error  
¥ ¥¡  
ll l  
¥¥ ¥¡  
l
l
¥ ¥¥¡  
Driving element short-circuit  
Position detection circuit erro  
P26  
l l  
¥ ¥¥¥¡  
P29  
l
* As the error code displayed on the wired remote controller may differ according to type of indoor model, multiple  
codes are described.  
– 125 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) Sensor, current, compressor operation frequency, PMV opening display  
The values detected by the controller, such as temperature sensor or current value are simply confirmed.  
(Legend)  
D800 (Yellow)  
D801 (Yellow)  
D802 (Yellow)  
D803 (Yellow)  
D804 (Yellow)  
D805 (Green)  
l
l
l
l
l
¡
: Go on  
l : Go off,  
¡
Temperature sensor (°C)  
Compressor  
operation  
frequency  
(rpm)  
PMV  
opening  
(Pulse)  
Current  
(A)  
TD  
SW803  
TE  
TS  
SW803  
TO  
SW803  
TL  
SW803  
Item  
setup  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
SW803  
TH  
SW803  
TA  
SW803  
TC  
SW803  
TCJ  
SW803  
LED  
display  
Below –25  
–25 to –21  
–20 to –16  
–15 to –11  
–10 to – 5  
–5 to –1  
0 to 4  
0 to 0.9  
1 to 1.9  
0 to 4  
5 to 9  
0 to 19  
20 to 39  
40 to 59  
60 to 79  
80 to 99  
100 to 119  
120 to 139  
140 to 159  
160 to 179  
180 to 199  
200 to 219  
220 to 239  
240 to 259  
260 to 279  
280 to 299  
300 to 319  
320 to 339  
340 to 359  
360 to 379  
380 to 399  
400 to 419  
420 to 439  
440 to 459  
460 to 479  
480 to 499  
500  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll  
¡
llll  
2 to 2.9  
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
80 to 84  
95 to 99  
100 to 104  
105 to 109  
110 to 114  
115 to 119  
120 to 124  
125 to 129  
130 to 134  
135 to 139  
140 to 144  
145 to 149  
150 to 154  
Over 155  
¡
l lll  
3 to 3.9  
¡¡  
lll  
4 to 4.9  
¡
ll ll  
5 to 5.9  
¡ ¡  
l ll  
6 to 6.9  
¡¡  
l
¡¡¡  
ll  
ll  
5 to 9  
7 to 7.9  
10 to 14  
15 to 19  
20 to 24  
25 to 29  
30 to 34  
35 to 39  
40 to 44  
45 to 49  
50 to 54  
55 to 59  
60 to 64  
65 to 69  
70 to 74  
75 to 79  
80 to 84  
85 to 89  
90 to 94  
95 to 99  
100 to 104  
105 to 109  
110 to 114  
115 to 119  
Over 120  
8 to 8.9  
¡ ¡  
lll l  
9 to 9.9  
¡
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡  
l l l  
¡ ¡  
10 to 10.9  
11 to 11.9  
12 to 12.9  
13 to 13.9  
14 to 14.9  
15 to 15.9  
16 to 16.9  
17 to 17.9  
18 to 18.9  
19 to 19.9  
20 to 20.9  
21 to 21.9  
22 to 22.9  
23 to 23.9  
24 to 24.9  
25 to 25.9  
26 to 26.9  
27 to 27.9  
28 to 28.9  
29 to 29.9  
30 to 30.9  
Over 31  
¡¡ ¡ ¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡  
ll  
l
¡ ¡¡ ¡  
l
¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡¡¡ ¡  
l
l
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
¡¡  
llll  
¡
lll  
¡
l ll  
¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡  
ll l  
¡ ¡ ¡¡  
l l  
¡¡ ¡¡  
l
l
¡¡¡ ¡¡  
lll  
l
¡¡¡  
¡
ll  
¡ ¡¡¡  
l l  
¡¡¡  
¡¡ ¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡  
ll  
¡ ¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡  
l
¡¡¡¡¡¡  
Sensor error, unconnected  
* As TD, TL and TH are sensors for high temperature, there is error at normal temperature or below position.  
* For current value, the current for the outdoor unit only is displayed.  
– 126 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4) Specific operation for maintenance check (SW801, SW804)  
The following specific operations for the maintenance check are performed by operation of SW801 or  
SW804.  
a) Select DIP switch SW804. (See table below)  
b) Push the pushdown button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.  
c) The following functions start. While each function starts, LED D805 (Green) flashes.  
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second, when selecting DIP  
switch SW804 or when the specified time of each function elapsed, each function stops and  
LED D805 (Green) returns to the continuous lighting.  
<Specific operation>  
SW804  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
Refrigerant recovery operation  
The outdoor unit performs cooling operation. The indoor unit does not work by this operation  
alone. Therefore operate the fan beforehand. (Refer 11-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control)  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
Indoor cooling test run demand  
The cooling test run is performed. (Note 1)  
Indoor heating test run demand  
The heating test run is performed. (Note 1)  
Fan motor forced operation  
Drive the fan motor forcedly.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
(No operation especially)  
[NOTE]  
Although these operations can  
be performed even during  
operation, basically perform  
operation while the unit stops.  
PMV full open operation  
Open PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
If performing this operation  
during driving the unit, it is  
dangerous because the  
pressure may change suddenly.  
PMV full close operation  
Close PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
PMV middle opening operation  
Set PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) to middle opening  
(250 pulses).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
Note 1) Indoor cooling test run demand / Indoor heating test run demand  
Only when combining with the following indoor unit, cooling/heating operation can be performed from the  
outdoor unit.  
Test run is available: Indoor unit of 4 series and after (RAV-SM  
4UT-E etc.)  
∗∗∗  
Test run is unavailable: Indoor units other than the above-mentioned indoor units, or indoor units other  
than above-mentioned indoor units are included in the twin connection.  
Note 2) The forced test run by this setting cannot be cleared on the indoor remote controller. Be sure to clear the  
test run by operation of the outdoor unit. (Push SW801 again for 1 second.)  
– 127 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SW804  
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed  
4-way valve relay operation (For RY700, CN70 check)  
Turn on 4-way valve power relay (RY700).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
SW804  
[NOTE]  
In case of model adopting the self hold valve  
(RAV-SP1104AFE, RAV-SP1404T-E), the coil develops fever.  
Therefore do not perform this operation as coil is connected.  
SW804  
SW804  
Self-hold valve suction operation (Exchange to heating cycle)  
(For RY700 RY701, RY705, CN701 check)  
Turn on relay RY700, RY701, RY705.  
(CN701 between  
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.  
and  
: Voltage=Approx. +198 to 380V)  

Self-hold valve separation operation (Exchange to cooling cycle)  
Turn on relay RY700.  
(CN701 between 1) and 4): Voltage=Approx. –198 to 380V)  
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.  
SV valve relay operation (For RY702, CN702 check)  
Turn on SV valve relay (RY702).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
* For R0A-AP1125 to 1605HS, the part is not mounted, so do not  
operate.  
[CAUTION]  
SW804  
Although these operations can  
be performed even during  
operation, basically perform  
operation while the unit stops.  
If performing this operation  
during driving the unit, it is  
dangerous because the  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
SW804  
Heater output relay operation (For check RY703, CN703 check)  
Turn on relay for option heater (RY703).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
pressure may change suddenly.  
Outside output relay operation (RY704, CN704)  
Turn on relay for outside output (RY704).  
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the  
operation returns to the normal control.  
(No operation especially)  
Relay operation change for outside output  
[CAUTION]  
Do not use this setting.  
– 128 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. ADDRESS SETUP  
12-1. Address Setup  
<Address setup procedure>  
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor  
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address  
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while  
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)  
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,  
indoor unit address, and group address  
Completion of cabling work  
NO  
Do you arbitrarily set the  
indoor unit address?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
(MANUAL)  
Is refrigerant line 1 line?  
YES  
Is group control performed?  
YES  
(To AUTO address mode)  
Do you change setting after  
automatic setting at the first time?  
YES  
Connect one remote controller with  
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with  
communication cable.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
After completion of address  
setup, change is to arbitral  
address/group manually.  
Setup of automatic  
address finishes within  
4 to 5 minutes.  
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.  
(
)
END  
• When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC10) on the indoor P.C. board, a test run  
operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)  
Item code Data at shipment  
Setup data range  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0030 (No. 30 unit)  
Line  
address  
12  
13  
0099  
0099  
Indoor unit  
address  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0030 (No. 30 unit)  
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line  
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)  
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)  
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)  
Group  
address  
14  
0099  
– 129 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2. Address Setup & Group Control  
<Terminology>  
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)  
Group address : 0 = Single (Not group control)  
1 = Master unit in group control  
2 = Sub unit in group control  
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from  
the remote controllers and sub indoor units. (* It has no relation with an indoor unit which  
communicates serially with the outdoor units.)  
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller  
LCD. (Except air direction adjustment of louver)  
Sub unit (= 2)  
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation  
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.  
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)  
Master unit (Representative unit) (Master Twin)  
: This unit communicates with the indoor unit (follower) which serial-communicates with the  
outdoor units and sends/receives signal (Command from compressor) to/from the outdoor  
units as the representative of the cycle control in the indoor units of the identical line address  
within the minimum unit which configures one of the refrigerating cycles of Twin.  
Follower unit (Subordinate unit) (Follower Twin)  
: Indoor units excluding the master unit in Twin  
This unit communicates with (Master) indoor unit in the identical line address and performs  
control synchronized with (Master) indoor unit.  
This unit does not perform the signal send/receive operation with the outdoor units. : No  
judgment for serial signal error.  
12-2-1. System configuration  
1. Single  
2. Twin  
Outdoor  
1-1  
Individual  
2-1  
Sub  
1-1  
Sub  
Indoor  
(Master/Sub)  
Remote  
controller  
3. Single group operation  
2-1  
Sub  
1-1  
Sub  
4-1  
Master  
3-1  
Sub  
8-1  
Sub  
– 130 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2-2. Automatic address example from unset address (No miscabling)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
2) Gr operation  
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial  
communication)  
1-1  
Individual  
2-1  
Sub  
1-1  
Sub  
4-1  
Master  
8-1  
Sub  
(Master/Sub)  
Max. 8 units  
X Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion) X  
– 131 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-3. Address Setup  
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be determined prior to piping work after cabling work  
(Manual setting from remote controller)  
<Address setup procedure>  
• Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.  
(Example of 2-lines cabling)  
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)  
Turn on power supply.  
OUT  
OUT  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously  
for 4 seconds or more.  
(Line address)  
Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons,  
set 12 to the item code.  
3
4
5
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
IN  
IN  
(Indoor unit address)  
Using the temperature setup  
set 13 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
2
1
2
Line address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
1
1
1
6
7
8
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
For the above example, perform setting by connecting  
singly the wired remote controller without remote  
controller inter-unit cable.  
(Group address)  
Using the temperature setup  
set 14 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
Group address  
Individual : 0000  
Master unit : 0001  
9
Using timer time  
0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.  
/
buttons, set 0000 to Individual,  
In case of group control  
Sub unit  
: 0002  
SET  
10  
11  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
TEST  
Push  
button.  
Setup completes. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
2, 5, 8  
3, 6, 9  
END 11  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
4, 7, 10  
1
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11  
– 132 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Confirmation of indoor unit No. position  
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized  
• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
<Procedure>  
ON / OFF  
1
2
Push  
button if the unit stops.  
UNIT  
Push  
button.  
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
(It disappears after several seconds.)  
1
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and  
indoor unit address.  
Operation  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
(When other indoor units are connected to the  
identical remote controller (Group control unit), other  
UNIT  
unit numbers are also displayed every pushing  
button.  
2
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2  
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address  
To confirm the unit No. in the group control  
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)  
<Procedure>  
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are  
successively displayed, and fan, louver, and drain pump  
of the corresponding indoor unit are turned on.  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
4 seconds or more.  
• Unit No.  
and  
buttons simultaneously for  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SAVE  
MODE  
VENT  
is displayed.  
1
3
• Fans and louvers of all the indoor units in the  
group control operate.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET  
CL  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT LOUVER  
UNIT  
2
Every pushing  
button, the unit numbers in  
the group control are successively displayed.  
• The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates the  
master unit address.  
2
<Operation procedure>  
• Fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only  
operate.  
END  
1 2 3  
TEST  
3
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
All the indoor units in the group control stop.  
– 133 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Maintenance/Check list>  
Aiming in environmental preservation, it is strictly recommended to clean and maintain the indoor/outdoor units  
of the operating air conditioning system regularly to secure effective operation of the air conditioner.  
It is also recommended to maintain the units once a year regularly when operating the air conditioner for a long  
time.  
Check periodically signs of rust or scratches, etc. on coating of the outdoor units.  
Repair the defective position or apply the rust resisting paint if necessary.  
If an indoor unit operates for approx. 8 hours or more per day, usually it is necessary to clean the indoor/outdoor  
units once three months at least.  
These cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified dealer.  
Although the customer has to pay the charge for the maintenance, the life of the unit can be prolonged.  
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will cause shortage of capacity, freezing, water leakage or  
trouble on the compressor.  
Object  
Part name  
Contents of check  
Contents of maintenance  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
Heat exchanger  
Fan motor  
• Blocking with dust, damage check  
• Audibility for sound  
• Clean it when blocking is found.  
• When abnormal sound is heard  
¡
¡
¡
¡
• Clean with water if dirty  
• Replace if any breakage  
Filter  
• Visual check for dirt and breakage  
¡
¡
¡
• Visual check for swing and balance  
• Check adhesion of dust and external  
appearance.  
• Replace fan when swinging or  
balance is remarkably poor.  
• If a large dust adheres, clean it with  
brush or water.  
Fan  
¡
Suction/  
Discharge grille  
• Repair or replace it if deformation or  
damage is found.  
• Visual check for dirt and scratch  
• Check blocking by dust and dirt of drain  
water.  
Drain pan  
• Clean drain pan, Inclination check  
• Cleaning/Coating with repair painting  
¡
¡
Face panel, Louver  
• Check dirt and scratch.  
• Check rust and pealing of insulator  
• Check pealing and floating of coating film  
External appearance  
• Coating with repair painting  
¡
– 134 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. DETACHMENTS  
13-1. Indoor Unit  
13-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Suction grille  

Suction grille  
Knobs of the  
suction grille hook  
XCAUTIONX  
Be sure to put on the gloves at disassembling  
work; otherwise an injury will be caused by a  
part, etc.  
Adjust  
corner cap  
Ceiling panel  
Hook for  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and  
then turn off switch of the breaker.  
falling-preventive strap  
2) Slide the 2 knobs of the suction grille  
inward and then hang down the suction  
grille.  
3) Remove a strap connecting the panel  
and the suction grille and then remove  
the suction grille.  
Hole for  
ceiling panel hook  
2. Attachment  
1) Hook the suction grille to the panel.  
2) Attach strap of the suction grille to the  
panel as before.  
3) Close the suction grille, slide the knobs  
outward and then fix the panel.  
Hinge  
Electric parts 1. Detachment  
Bell mouth pin  
Claw of  
electric parts box  
cover  
1) Carry out work of item 1. of  
.

2) Remove the fixing screw A which fixes  
the electric parts cover and loosen the  
fixing screw B.  
3) Pull down the electric parts cover,  
remove pin of the bell mouth and then  
slide it to the arrow direction in order to  
open the claws and the electric parts box  
cover.  
Potbelly hole  
(Dharma doll hole)  
Fixing screw B  
Sliding ddirecction  
Claw of eelectric  
parts box cover  
Fixing screw BA  
2. Attachment  
1) Close the electric parts cover and slide it,  
hook claw of the electric parts box, claw  
of the electric parts box cover and the  
Dharma doll hole, and then insert pin of  
the bell mouth into hole of the electric  
parts box cover.  
Electric parts box cover  
2) Tighten the fixing screws A and B and  
then fix the electric parts box cover.  
3) Following to work of item 2 of , mount  

the suction grille as before.  
– 135 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Electric parts cover  
(Continued)  
Adjust corner cap  
1. Detachment  
ƒ
Adjust corner cap  
1) Pull knob of the adjust corner cap to  
the arrow direction, remove strap of  
the adjust corner cap from pin of  
the panel and then remove all the  
4 corners of the cap.  
Knob  
NOTE :  
The knob is provided to only one side.  
Be sure to remove the cap of the  
knob side at first.  
Pulling direction  
2. Attachment  
1) Hook strap of the adjust corner cap  
securely to pin of the ceiling panel.  
2) Insert claw of the adjust corner cap  
into the square hole of the panel.  
(2 positions)  
Pin  
3) Push claws of the adjust corner cap  
into the positions indicated with  
arrow marks so that they fit in  
3 positions.  
Strap of  
adjust corner cap  
Claws  
(3 positions)  
Claw  
Square hole  
Push into positions with arrow marks  
– 136 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Ceiling panel 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Clamp  
1) Carry out works of item 1 of  
and item 1  
of  
.
ƒ
Louver motor wiring  
2) Remove the flap connector  
(CN510, White, 20P) connected to the  
control P.C. board and then remove the  
lead wire from the clamp.  
NOTE :  
CN510  
Unlock the lock of the housing part and  
then remove the connector.  
Square hole of indoor unit  
3) Loosen the panel fixing 4 screws.  
4) Slide the panel fixing brackets  
(4 positions) outward.  
5) Push the tentative bracket outward and  
then remove the ceiling panel.  
2. Attachment  
Electric parts box  
Panel fixing screw  
1) Insert the tentative brackets (2 positions)  
of the ceiling panel into square holes of  
the indoor unit and then hook the panel  
tentatively.  
Louver motor wiring  
NOTE :  
The ceiling panel has the directional  
properties against the indoor unit.  
Tentative bracket  
Ceiling panel  
Direct the louver motor wire to the electric  
parts box side of the indoor unit.  
Square hole of indoor unit  
2) Pass the head of the panel fixing screw  
through hole of the panel fixing bracket  
and then slide the panel fixing bracket  
inward.  
Push iin case  
of removing  
3) Tighten in the panel fixing screw to fix the  
ceiling panel.  
4) Following to work of item 2 of , attach  
ƒ
the adjust corner cap as before.  
Tentative bracket  
5) Connect the louver connector  
(CN510, White, 20P) as before and then  
fix the lead wire with clamp.  
Square hole of indoor unit  
6) Following to work of item 2 of , mount  
the electric parts box cover and the  
suction grille as before.  
Panel fixing screw  
Inner side  
Panel fixing bracket  
Outer side  
Sliding direction  
– 137 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Control  
P.C. board  
1. Detachment  
Clamp  
1) Carry out work of item 1 of  
.
2) Remove connectors which are connected  
from the control P.C. board to the other  
parts and then remove wiring from the  
clamp.  
CN510 : Louver motor (20P, White)  
CN34 : Float switch (3P, Red)  
CN504 : Drain pump (2P, White)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P, Black)  
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P, Red)  
CN104 : Room temp. Sensor (2P, Orange)  
CN333 : Fan motor power supply  
(5P, White)  
Card edge spacer  
CN334 : Fan motor position detection  
(3P, White)  
NOTE :  
Unlock the lock of the housing part and then  
remove the connector.  
3) Unlock the locks of the card edge spacer  
(6 positions) and then remove the control  
P.C. board.  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix the control P.C. board to the card edge  
spacer (6 positions)  
2) Connect the connector removed in item 1  
as before and then fix the wiring with the  
clamp.  
3) Following to work of item 2 of , mount  
ƒ
the electric parts box cover and the  
suction grille as before.  
– 138 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Drain cap  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
Drain cap (outside)  
1) Carry out work of item 1 of  
.

2) Loosen screws (3 positions) fixing the drain  
cap (outside) and then turn the drain cap to  
the arrow mark direction to remove it.  
CLOSE  
OPEN  
NOTE :  
The drain cap is hung down because a strap  
is attached to it (outside).  
3) Loosen the cap by turn the drain cap  
(inside) for approx. 1 turn to OPEN  
direction and then drain the drain water  
accumulated in the drain pan.  
Strap  
Drain cap fixing screws  
NOTE :  
Be sure to catch drain water using a bucket,  
etc. when loosening the drain cap.  
Drain cap (inside)  
The insulating materials are adhered to the  
drain cap (outside) and opening part of the  
drain pan; be careful that they are not come off.  
If they are come off, stick them as before  
using double-faces tape, etc.  
CLOSE  
4) Turn the drain cap once again to OPEN  
direction to remove it.  
OPEN  
2. Attachment  
Drain pan  
mark  
Drain cap  
mark  
1) Insert the drain cap (inside), turn it to  
CLOSE direction until the position  
where “Clashed sound” is heard and it  
cannot be turned more over  
(Position where  
matches with  
mark of the drain pan  
mark of the drain cap  
(inside)) and then fix it.  
NOTE :  
When attaching the drain cap (inside),  
remove dirt attached to the packing.  
And tighten in it noting so that the cap is not  
slantingly set.  
If attaching the drain cap as dust or dirt is  
attached or the cap is set slantingly, water  
leakage is caused.  
2) Turn the drain cap (outside) to direction  
and then attach it using the fixing screw as  
original.  
3) Following to work of item 2 of , mount  

the suction grille as before.  
– 139 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Fan motor  
Procedure  
Remarks  
1. Detachment  
Fixing screw A  
1) Carry out work of item 1 of  
.
2) Remove connectors which are connected  
from the control P.C. board to the other  
parts and then remove each wiring from  
the clamp.  
CN510 : Louver motor (20P, White)  
CN34 : Float switch (3P, Red)  
CN504 : Drain pump (2P, White)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P, Black)  
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P, Red)  
CN104 : Room temp. Sensor (2P, Orange)  
CN333 : Fan motor power supply  
(5P, White)  
Fixing screw B  
Electric parts box  
Clamp  
CN334 : Fan motor position detection  
(3P, White)  
NOTE :  
Unlock the lock of the housing part and then  
remove the connector.  
Fan motor lead  
Bell mouth  
TC sensor  
Nut cap  
TCJ sensor  
3) Remove the fixing screws A and B, and  
then remove the electric parts box.  
(Fixing screw A: Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs,  
Fixing screw B: Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
4) Remove the fan motor lead, TC sensor  
and TCJ sensor from clamp of the bell  
mouth.  
5) Remove the fixing screws and then  
remove the bell mouth. (Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs.)  
6) Remove the fixing screws and then  
remove the nut cap. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
7) Remove the fixing nut and then remove  
the turbo fan. (M8 nut with flange, 1 pc.)  
8) Remove the fixing screws and then  
remove the motor lead holding bracket.  
(Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
9) Cut the bundling band and then remove it  
from the clamp.  
Fixing screw  
Turbo fan  
10) Remove the fixing nut and then remove  
the fan motor. (Ø6 nut, 3 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix the parts as before in order of fan  
motor motor lead holding bracket →  
turbo fan nut cap bell mouth.  
NOTE :  
Fix the motor lead to the clamp without  
slack as before using bundling band.  
When fixing the turbo fan, be sure to match  
the D-cut of the fan boss with D-cut of the  
motor shaft.  
M8 nut with flange  
Using a torque wrench, fix the turbo fan and  
+0.5  
–0.2  
tighten it to 5.4  
Nm.  
– 140 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan motor  
(Continued)  
2. Attachment  
M6 nut  
2) Fix the fan motor lead, TC sensor and TCJ  
sensor with the clamp of the bell mouth.  
3) Mount the electric parts box with the fixing  
screws A and B.  
(Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs. Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
4) Connect the connector removed in item 1  
as before and then fix wiring with the  
clamp.  
Fan motor  
Motorr lead  
holdingg bracket  
5) Following to work of item 2 of , mount  
ƒ
the electric parts box cover and the  
suction grille as before.  
Fixing screws (Ø4 × 8)  
Clamp  
Fan motor lead  
– 141 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Drain pump 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
ˆ
Fixing screw A  
1) Carry out works of item 1 of  
and item  
1 of  
.
2) Remove the drain pump connector  
(CN504, White, 2P) connected to the  
control P.C. board and then remove the  
lead wire from the clamp.  
Drain port  
3) Remove the fixing screws and then  
remove the drain pump. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
4) As shown in the right figure, first pull out  
the connecting part of the drain pump and  
the drain hose from the drain port and  
then take out the drain pump.  
5) Set direction of the knob of the hose band  
downward, slide it from the pump connecting  
part to the hose side and then remove the  
drain hose from the drain pump.  
Drain pump  
6) Pass the connector of the drain pump lead  
wire through the wiring taking-out port and  
then take out the drain pump.  
CN504  
Drainn pump  
lead wire  
2. Attachment  
1) Enter your hand into the drain port and  
pass the connector of the drain pump lead  
wire through the wiring taking-out port.  
2) Connect the drain hose to the drain pump  
as before.  
NOTE :  
Wiring taking-out port  
Drain pump  
Insert the drain hose up to the end of the  
drain pump connecting part, apply band to  
the white mark position of the hose and then  
set the band knob upward.  
Clamp  
Drain hose  
3) Return the drain pump to the indoor unit  
and then mount it as before using the  
fixing screws. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
4) Connect the drain pump connector  
(CN504, White, 2P) to the control P.C.  
board and then fix it as before with the  
clamp.  
Pump connecting part  
5) Following to words of item 2 of  
and item  
2 of , mount the drain cap, the electric  
parts box cover and the suction grille as  
before.  
Slide to drain hose side.  
Hose band  
– 142 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Float switch 1. Detachment  
Procedure  
Remarks  
assembly  
1) Carry out works of item 1 of  
from 1) to 5).  
and works  
Floatt swittcch asseembly  
2) Remove the fixing screw and then remove  
the float switch assembly. (Ø4 × 25, 1 pc.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the float switch assembly as before  
with the fixing screw.  
Fixing scrrew (ØØ44 × 25)  
NOTE :  
Hole of float switch assembly  
When mounting, match hole of the float switch  
assembly with projection of the drain pan.  
2) Mount the bell mouth as before.  
(Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs.)  
3) Following to works of item 2 of  
and  
works from 2) to 5), attach the parts as  
before.  
Projeectionn of draain pan  
Drain pan  
1. Detachment  
Š
1) Carry out works of item 1 of , item 1 of  
, item 1 of  
and works from 2 to 5).  
2) Remove the fixing screws to remove the  
drain pan. (Ø4 ×10, 4 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix parts as before in order of drain cap →  
drain pan bell mouth.  
2) Following to works of item 2 of  
and  
works from 2) to 5), attach parts as before.  
Fixing screws (Ø4 ×10)  
Fixing screws (Ø4 ×10)  
– 143 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Heat  
exchanger  
1. Detachment  
11  
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.  
2) Carry out work of item 1 of  
.
Š
3) Remove refrigerant pipe at indoor unit side.  
4) Remove the fixing screws and then  
remove the piping cover. (Ø4 ×10, 3 pcs.)  
5) Remove the drain hose from the drain  
pump and remove the fixing screws to  
remove the drain pump stand.  
(Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)  
Fixing screws (Ø4 ×10)  
6) While pushing the heat exchanger, remove  
the fixing band, fixing screws and the heat  
exchanger. (Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)  
Piping cover  
2. Attachment  
Fixing screws  
4 ×10)  
1) Mount the heat exchanger with the fixing  
band and the fixing screws. (Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)  
2) Fix the parts as before in order of drain  
pump stand piping cover.  
3) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before and  
then apply vacuuming.  
Drain puump stand  
4) Following to work of item 2 of , attach  
Š
the parts as before.  
Fixing screws  
(Ø4 ×10)  
Fixing band  
Fixing screw  
Fixing band  
Heat exchanger  
– 144 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Common  
procedure  

Front panel  
XCAUTIONX  
Never forget to put on the gloves at working  
time; otherwise an injury will be caused by the  
parts, etc.  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and  
then turn off switch of the breaker.  
2) Remove the front panel.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
• Remove the screws and then remove the  
front panel by pulling it downward.  
3) Remove the power supply cable and the  
indoor/outdoor connecting wire from the  
cord clamp and the terminal.  
4) Remove the top plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
Top plate  
1) Attach the top plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
2) Connect the power supply cable and the  
indoor/outdoor connecting wire to the  
terminal and then fix them with the cord  
clamp.  
XREQUIREMENTX  
For the power supply cable and the indoor/  
outdoor connecting wire, be sure fix them  
using the bundling band on the market along  
the crossover pipe so that they do not come to  
contact with the compressor, valve at gas side,  
pipe at gas side and discharge pipe.  
3) Attach the front panel.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
– 145 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
1. Detachment  
Motor base Discharge port cabinet  
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.

Heat exchanger  
Partition board  
2) Remove screws for the discharge port  
cabinet and the partition board.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 4 pcs.)  
3) Remove screws for the discharge port  
cabinet and the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screws for the discharge cabinet  
and the motor base.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove screw for the discharge cabinet  
and the heat exchanger.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove screws for the discharge port  
cabinet and the fin guard.  
Fin guard  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Side cabinet  
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.

ƒ
Inverter assembly  
Side cabinet  
2) Remove the screws which fix the inverter  
assembly and the side cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
3) Remove the screws for the side cabinet  
and the valve fixing plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screws for the side cabinet and  
the piping panel (Rear).  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove screw for the side cabinet and the  
bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove screws for the side cabinet and  
the fin guard (Heat exchanger).  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
Valve fixing plate  
– 146 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Replacement of 1. Control P.C. board  
Control P.C. board Upper fan motor  
electric parts  
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.

Compressor  
Reactor lead  
case thermo.  
X
WARNINGX  
Never disassemble the inverter for  
1 minute after power supply has been  
turned off because an electric shock may  
be caused.  
Lower  
fan motor  
Compressor lead  
2) Remove the connectors connected to  
the control P.C. board. (Indoor power  
supply, Temperature sensor, PMV coil,  
4-way valve coil, Compressor case  
thermo, Fan motor)  
Temperature  
sensor  
Earth wire  
• Unlock the lock of the housing part  
and then remove the connectors.  
4-way valve coil  
3) Remove the lead wires connected to  
the control P.C. board.  
PMV coil  
Indoor power supply  
Element fixing screws  
Compressor lead U: CN200 Red  
V: CN201 White  
P.C. board  
fixing screw (9 positions)  
W: CN202 Black  
Reactor cord  
CN05 White  
CN06 White  
4) Remove the earth wire from the control  
P.C. board.  
(Trust B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 1 pc.)  
5) Remove the fixing screws of the control  
P.C. board. (Screw with collar for fixing  
element Ø3 × 16, 9 pcs. Pan S tight  
screw for fixing board Ø3 × 20, 1 pc.)  
6) Remove the control P.C. board.  
(Supporter: 5 positions)  
NOTE :  
Be careful to take out because there is  
sealing material for the heat sink.  
Insulating sheet  
Sealing material  
Control P.C. board  
7) Replace the control P.C. board with a  
new one.  
NOTE :  
• Be sure not to confuse for Compressor  
lead V (CN201 White), Reactor lead  
CN05 and CN06.  
• Be sure not to come-off of the  
insulating sheet.  
– 147 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Replacement of 2. Reactor  
Bundling band  
(Compressor lead, Reactor lead)  
electric parts  
1) Carry out work of 1 of  
.

(Continued)  
2) Remove the reactor lead connected to  
the control P.C. board.  
Control P.C. board  
Reactor lead  
CN05 White, CN06 White  
3) Cut the bundling band which bundled  
the compressor lead and fan motor  
lead.  
4) Remove the reactor.  
(Trust B tight screw, Ø4 × 6, 2 pcs.)  
5) Replace the reactor with a new one.  
NOTE :  
Be sure to bundle the removed bundling  
band with the bundling band on the  
market.  
Be careful so that the fan motor lead  
does not come to contact with the  
reactor body.  
Reactor lead  
Reactor body  
Bundling band  
(Compressor lead, Reactor lead)  
Fan motor lead  
Bundling band  
(Fan motor lead, Reactor lead)  
– 148 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan motor  
1) Carry out works of item 1 of  
and work of  
.

2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor  
and the propeller fan.  
Propelller fan  
Looseened by  
turning clockwise  
• The flange nut is loosened by turning it  
clockwise. (When tightening it, turn it  
counterclockwise.)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Remove the connector for the fan motor from  
the inverter. (Remove the ferrite core of the  
lower fan motor because it is used.)  
Flange nut  
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan  
motor lead fixed rubber of the penetrated part  
of the partition board.  
Propeller fan  
6) Remove the fixing screws (4 pieces each)  
while supporting the fan motor so that it does  
not fall down.  
* Cautions for assembling of fan motor  
• Tighten the flange nut with 4.95N•m  
(50kgf•cm).  
• Adjust length of the fan motor lead wire at  
the fan motor lead fixed rubber so that the  
fan motor lead is not slackened; otherwise  
the fan motor lead may come to contact  
with the propeller fan.  
Fan motor  
Connector of  
upper fan motor  
Attach the fan motor lead fixed rubber to  
the partition board so that the projection is  
set at the refrigerating cycle side.  
Connector of  
lower fan motor  
• Be sure so that the rector body does not  
contact with the fan motor lead.  
• Be sure to bundle the removed bundling  
band with the bundling band on the  
market.  
Ferrite core of  
lower fan motor  
• Necessarily attach the ferrite core of the  
lower fan motor again.  
(Fix it with bundling band on the market.)  
XREQUIREMENTX  
Fan motor lead  
fixed rubber  
Be sure to fix the fan motor lead to the motor  
base using the metal band of the motor base  
so that the fan motor lead does not come to  
contact with the propeller fan.  
Projection/Refrigerating  
cycle side  
Fan mottor lead  
fixedd rubber  
Projection/Refrigerating  
cycle side  
Fan motor  
– 149 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor 1. Removal of defective compressor  
Piping panel (Front)  
Compressor  
lead  
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.  
2) Carry out work of item 1 of  
and work of  

.
ƒ
3) Remove the piping panel (Front).  
Remove the piping panel (Front) and  
screws of the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Piping panel (Rear)  
Pipe cover  
Bundling band  
(For tthermmal proof)  
Remove screw of the piping panel (Front)  
and the piping panel (Rear).  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)  
Compresssor lead  
TD sensor  
4) Remove the piping panel (Rear).  
Remove the piping panel (Rear) and  
screws of the bottom plate.  
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
Compressor case thermo.  
5) Remove the sound-insulation plate.  
(Upper, rolling in, rolling out)  
Control PP.C. bboard  
6) Remove the terminal cover of the com-  
pressor and then remove the compressor  
lead and the compressor case thermo.  
7) Remove TD sensor which is fixed to the  
discharge pipe.  
8) Remove the compressor lead.  
(Leave the ferrite core as it is attached to  
the electric parts box.)  
Compresssor lead  
Control P.C. board U : CN200 Red  
V : CN201 White  
Compresssor lead  
W: CN202 Black  
9) Using a burner, remove the discharge pipe  
and the suction pipe which are connected  
to the compressor.  
X
WARNINGX  
In case of removing the piping by broiling the  
welded part with a burner, if there is oil in the  
pipe, it may burst into flames at the moment  
that wax melted, so take sufficient care.  
Ferritte core  
Remove  
(Discharrge pipe)  
CAUTION :  
Note so that the flame does not catch the  
4-way valve and PMV.  
(A malfunction may be caused.)  
Remove  
(Suctioon pipe)  
10) Pull off the discharge pipe and the suction  
pipe of the refrigerating cycle upward.  
11) Remove the compressor nuts which fix the  
compressor to the bottom plate. (3 pcs.)  
12) Pull out the compressor toward you.  
CAUTION :  
As weight of the compressor is 20kg or  
more, handle it by 2 workers.  
Compresssor nuts  
(3 pcs.)  
– 150 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor 2. Mounting of compressor  
Wrap the ferrite core with the compressor lead wire  
for 4 times.  
Compressor  
lead  
1) Mount the compressor in the reverse  
procedure for removal.  
Compressor lead  
(Continued)  
NOTE :  
• After replacement of the compressor, be  
sure to replace the compressor lead.  
(Repair part code of compressor lead:  
43160591)  
0 to 50  
In this time, wrap the ferrite core with the  
compressor lead wire by 4 times.  
• As shown in the right figure, mount the  
sound-insulation plate (rolling in, rolling  
out) by passing through it between the  
compressor and the piping, and between  
the piping and the partition board.  
Ferrite core  
0 to 50  
(Compressor lead positioning standard)  
Put the end of sound-  
insulation plate  
(rolling out) on the other  
end at this position.  
Pass through sound-  
insulation plate  
(rolling out) between  
suction pipe and  
header pipe.  
• Fix TD sensor by the bundling band for  
heat-proof on the market via the pipe  
cover so that TD sensor does not directly  
come to contact with the discharge pipe.  
Header pipe  
Suction pipe  
3. Vacuuming  
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge  
port and the check joint of the gas pipe  
valve and then drive the vacuum pump.  
2) Carry out vacuuming until the vacuum low  
pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).  
Discharge pipe  
Pass through sound-insulation plate (rolling in)  
between compressor and discharge pipe,  
suction pipe and then put the end of sound-  
insulation plate on the other end at this position.  
NOTE :  
Before vacuuming, open PMV fully.  
If PMV is closed, vacuum may be impossible  
between liquid pipe valve and PMV of the  
outdoor unit.  
There should be no clearance between sound-  
insulation plate (upper) and sound-insulation plate  
(rolling out).  
Sound-insulation plate  
(upper)  
Forced full-opening method of PMV  
Turn on the leakage breaker.  
Turn on 1 and 3 of Dip switch SW804 on the  
control P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
Cultural rivet  
• Keep pushing SW801 on the control P.C. board  
of the outdoor unit for 1 second or more.  
• After pushing SW801 for 1 second or more,  
turn off the leakage breaker within 2 minutes.  
Insert one side  
under cultural rivet.  
4. Refrigerant charge  
Sound-insulation plate  
(rolling out)  
1) Add the refrigerant amount determined by  
the pipe length from the charge port of the  
valve.  
SW801  
SW804  
– 151 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
PMV coil  
1. Detachment  
Concave part  
PMV main unit  
1) Carry out work of item 1 of  
.

2) Turn the coil while pulling upward and then  
remove the coil from the PMV main unit.  
2. Attachment  
1) Surely match the positioning projection of  
the coil with the concave part of PMV main  
unit and then fix it.  
Positioning projection  
PMV coil  
Fan guard  
1. Detachment  
ˆ
Fan guard  
Bell mouth  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
1) Carry out works of item 1 of  
and work  

of  
.
XREQUIREMENTX  
To prevent scratch on the product, carry out  
the work on cardboard, cloth, etc.  
2) Remove the discharge port cabinet and  
then put on it so that the fan guard side  
directs downward.  
3) Remove the hooking claws (8 positions) of  
the fan guard.  
Hooking claw  
2. Attachment  
1) Push the hooking claws (8 positions) with  
hands from the front side to fix the claws.  
XREQUIREMENTX  
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed at  
the specified positions.  
– 152 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST  
14-1. Indoor Unit  
14-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
223, 238 226  
227  
246  
230  
225  
212  
228  
201  
202  
229  
239  
231  
234  
204, 205  
243  
237  
215  
206  
214, 235  
242  
224  
219, 220, 221,  
222, 240, 241  
208  
244  
247  
232  
207 233 245 236 218  
216, 217  
211  
213  
203  
210  
209  
– 153 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model Name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
564UT-E  
804UT-E  
1104UT-E  
1404UT-E  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
43120247 Fan Ass’y, Turbo, ABS  
43120248 Fan Ass’y, Turbo, ABS  
43166011 Remote Controller, SX-A4EE  
4314J399 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
4314J400 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
4314J401 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
43122110 Bell Mouth, ABS  
43172202 Pan Ass’y, Drain  
43166004 Remote Controller, SX-A11JE2  
43166005 Remote Controller, EX-W2JE2  
43166006 Remote Controller, WH-H1JE2  
43170244 Hose, Drain, 25A  
43179144 LID, Inside  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
43151290 Switch, Float, FS-0218-102  
43079249 Band, Hose  
43163057 Clamp, Down, ABS  
43163058 Clamp, Up, ABS  
43089147 Clamp, Wire, NYLON6  
43047688 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN, RoHs  
43149352 Nut, Flare, 5/8 IN  
43149353 Socket, 1/2”  
1
1
3
4
43149354 Socket, 5/8”  
1
3
43139137 Rubber, Cushion  
43122099 Plate, Wind  
4
4
3
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
43197197 Screw, Fix Panel  
43139165 Rubber, Cushion  
43197199 Washer  
4
4312C038 Motor, Fan  
4312C039 Motor, Fan  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
43119497 Cover Ass’y  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43139166 Cap, Nut  
43179147 Gasket, VMQ  
43119498 Cover, Sensor, ABS  
43177010 Pump Ass’y, MDP-1401  
43151299 Switch Ass’y, Float, FS-0218-102  
43179145 LID Ass’y, Outside  
43170254 Socket Ass’y, Drain  
43197155 Washer, 25X6, 5X2T  
430497212 Nut  
1
1
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2, IN  
43194029 Bonnet  
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor, SUS  
43179135 Band, Hose, 37-40  
43179146 Cover, Glass  
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43182010 String  
431S8083 Owner’s Manual  
43179148 Glass  
– 154 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E  
403  
404  
405  
401  
402  
Model Name RAV-SM  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
564UT-E  
804UT-E  
1104UT-E  
1404UT-E  
401  
402  
403  
404  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, TC (F6), Service  
43050426 Sensor, TA, Service  
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal, Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A  
43160568 Terminal, 2P, AC30V/DC42V, 1A  
P.C. Board Ass’y, 220–240V,  
4316V355  
405  
1
1
1
1
MCC-1570  
– 155 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RBC-U31PG (W)-E, RBC-U31PG (WS)-E  
316  
320  
303  
317  
319  
318  
305  
312  
308, 309  
315  
322  
304  
306, 307  
313  
314  
302  
310, 311  
321  
301  
Model Name RBC-  
U31PG (W)-E U31PG (WS)-E  
Location  
Part No.  
Description  
No.  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
308  
309  
310  
311  
312  
313  
314  
315  
316  
317  
318  
319  
320  
321  
322  
43409207 Grille, Air Inlet  
43480017 Air Filter, ABS + PPNET  
4302D003 Motor, Louver, MP24Z3N  
43407145 Outlet, Air Form, PS-F  
43407146 Outlet, Air Form, PS-F  
43409212 Louver, ABS  
1
1
1
4
2
2
4
1
4
2
2
43409216 Louver, ABS  
4
3
43401037 Cover, Panel Ass’y  
43401041 Cover, Panel Ass’y  
43401043 Cover, Panel Ass’y  
43401047 Cover, Panel Ass’y  
43407148 Plate, Fix, Panel  
43407149 Plate, Fix, Panel  
43407150 Hook, ABS  
3
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
43407154 Cap, AXIS, POM  
43403010 Cover Ass’y, Motor  
43403011 Cover Ass’y  
43403012 Cover Ass’y  
43407155 Fix, Motor, ABS  
43407156 Fix, Motor, ABS  
43460125 Lead, Motor  
43400077 Panel, Front, PS (W)  
– 156 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RBC-AX31U (W)-E, RBC-AX31U (WS)-E  
354  
358  
353  
355  
356, 357  
Model Name RBC-  
Location  
Part No.  
Description  
No.  
AX31U (W)-E  
AX31U (WS)-E  
353  
354  
355  
356  
357  
358  
43459011 P.C. Board Ass’y, Remote Reciever  
43462010 Cover, WRS, ABS  
43461006 Sheet, PC  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43108018 Cover, Panel, WRS  
43108019 Cover, Panel, WRS  
43460126 Lead  
1
1
1
– 157 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
13  
2
1
17  
30  
18  
28  
29  
22  
15  
20  
26, 32  
14  
31, 33  
24  
34  
35  
19  
27, 37  
4, 25  
11  
3
16  
6, 9  
21 5  
23  
7, 8, 36  
12  
10  
– 158 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
No.  
Part No.  
Description  
1104AT-E 1404AT-E 1104ATZ-E 1404ATZ-E 1104ATZG-E 1404ATZG-E  
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor, SUS  
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
3
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
3
43041794 Compressor, DA422A3F-25M  
43047246 Bonnet, 3/8 IN  
4
5
43047669 Nut, Flange  
5
43197164 Nut, Flange, SUS304-WSB  
43049739 Cushion, Rubber  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43097212 Nut  
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
6
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
7
8
9
9
43197174 Nut, Comp., SWCH10R  
43100437 Panel, Front, Piping  
43100438 Panel, Back, Piping  
43100439 Panel, Front  
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
28  
29  
29  
29  
30  
30  
30  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
43100440 Plate, Roof  
43100441 Panel, Side  
43100442 Panel, Air Outlet  
43100443 Base Ass’y  
43107274 Guard, Fin, Side  
43107275 Guard, Fin, Back  
43107276 Hanger, PP  
43109422 Guard, Fan, PP  
43120244 Fan, Propeller, PB521, SAN-GF20  
43122113 Bell, Mouth, PP  
4312C037 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A100-1  
43146676 Joint, Check  
43146686 Valve, Packed, 9.52  
43146687 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0401G  
43146724 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA5GTC-1, Rohs  
43148170 Accumulator Ass’y, 2.5L  
43148188 Accumulator, 2.5L  
4314G266 Condenser Ass’y, Down  
4314G267 Condenser Ass’y, Down  
4314G268 Condenser Ass’y, Down  
4314G269 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G270 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
4314G271 Condenser Ass’y, Up  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Valve, Plus, Modulaing,  
4314N023  
31  
32  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UKV-25D100  
Coil, Valve, 4-Way,  
4314N024  
1
1
VHV-01AP552B1  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
4314N025 Coil, PMV, UKV-A038  
4314Q031 Strainer, DIA 9.52, C1220T-H  
4314Q032 Strainer  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43160591 Lead Ass’y, Compressor  
43194029 Bonnet  
– 159 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E / RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E /  
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E  
709, 710  
711  
704  
707  
706  
708  
702  
705  
703  
701  
Model Name RAV-SP  
Location  
Part No.  
Description  
No.  
1104AT-E 1404AT-E 1104ATZ-E 1404ATZ-E 1104ATZG-E 1404ATZG-E  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, TC (F6), Service  
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6 - 6.35, 8  
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, TD (F4), Service  
43158190 Reactor, CH-62-ZT  
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A  
43160581 Terminal, 3P, 60A  
43160589 Fuse, AC250V, 10A  
43163055 Holder, Sensor  
43163059 Spacer (Bush), P.C. Board  
43163060 Spacer (Collar), P.C. Board  
4316V357 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1571  
– 160 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE  
Important  
Check of Concentration Limit  
NOTE 2 :  
The room in which the air conditioner is to be  
installed requires a design that in the event of  
refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will not  
exceed a set limit.  
The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.  
(1) No partition (shaded portion)  
The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air  
conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of  
ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed  
which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains  
more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its  
concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from  
leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent  
increase in the number of high concentration buildings,  
however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems  
is on the increase because of the need for effective use  
of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by  
curtailing heat and carrying power etc.  
(2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent  
room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas  
(opening without a door, or an opening 0.15% or  
larger than the respective floor spaces at the top or  
bottom of the door).  
Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able  
to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with  
conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of  
the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small  
room, select a suitable model and installation procedure  
so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its  
concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event  
of an emergency, measures can be made before injury  
can occur).  
In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit,  
create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install  
mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak  
detection device.  
Outdoor unit  
Refrigerant piping  
Indoor unit  
(3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room  
and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the  
smallest room of course becomes the object. But  
when a mechanical ventilation is installed interlocked  
with a gas leakage detector in the smallest room  
where the density limit is exceeded, the volume of  
the next smallest room becomes the object.  
The concentration is as given below.  
Total amount of refrigerant (kg)  
Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)  
Concentration limit (kg/m³)  
Refrigerant piping  
Outdoor unit  
The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi  
air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.  
Very  
small  
Indoor unit  
room  
NOTE 1 :  
Small  
room  
Medium  
room  
If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single  
refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be  
as charged in each independent device.  
Large room  
Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector  
NOTE 3 :  
The minimum indoor floor area compared with the  
amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:  
(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)  
Outdoor unit  
e.g., charged  
e.g.,  
amount (10kg)  
charged amount (15kg)  
40  
Range below the  
35  
m²  
density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
(countermeasures  
not needed)  
Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F  
Indoor unit  
Range above  
the density limit  
of 0.3 kg/m³  
(countermeasures  
needed)  
For the amount of charge in this example:  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms A, B and C is 10kg.  
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in  
rooms D, E and F is 15kg.  
0
10  
20  
30  
Total amount of refrigerant  
kg  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION  
23-17, TAKANAWA 3 CHOME, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-0074, JAPAN  
Copyright © 1999 to 2005 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam Universal Remote RC 828 User Manual
Taylor Refrigerator taylor User Manual
Taylor Weather Radio 2752 User Manual
Toshiba CD Player C6609 1201M1 User Manual
TP Link Saw TD 8817 User Manual
TRENDnet Server 1 Port Multi Function Printer Server User Manual
Triarch Indoor Furnishings 29232 22 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Washer Dryer BWD 134 W User Manual
Uniden Scanner UBC 245XLT User Manual
Vizio Universal Remote HDTV10A User Manual